0% found this document useful (0 votes)
192 views244 pages

92 Electrical Systems: Maintenance Manual Bo 105

This document is the maintenance manual for the electrical systems of the BO 105 helicopter. It provides detailed instructions on inspecting, maintaining, troubleshooting and testing various electrical components including the DC power system, starter-generators, voltage regulators, battery power system, external power system, monitoring equipment, starter and ignition system. The manual contains sections on common electrical components, main and auxiliary relay boxes, generator operation, power distribution and protection circuits.

Uploaded by

Cleber Souza
Copyright
© © All Rights Reserved
Available Formats
Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd
Download as pdf or txt
0% found this document useful (0 votes)
192 views244 pages

92 Electrical Systems: Maintenance Manual Bo 105

This document is the maintenance manual for the electrical systems of the BO 105 helicopter. It provides detailed instructions on inspecting, maintaining, troubleshooting and testing various electrical components including the DC power system, starter-generators, voltage regulators, battery power system, external power system, monitoring equipment, starter and ignition system. The manual contains sections on common electrical components, main and auxiliary relay boxes, generator operation, power distribution and protection circuits.

Uploaded by

Cleber Souza
Copyright
© © All Rights Reserved
Available Formats
Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd
Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1/ 244

MAINTENANCE MANUAL BO 105

92 ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

Table of Contents

Paragraph Title Page

92 -- 1 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
92 -- 2 Common electrical components of the electrical systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
92 -- 3 Removal and installation -- common electrical components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
92 -- 4 Inspection -- common electrical components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
92 -- 5 Main relay box 1VE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
92 -- 6 Relay box 10VE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
92 -- 7 DC POWER SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
92 -- 8 Component location -- DC power system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
92 -- 9 DC power system controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
92 -- 10 Generator operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
92 -- 11 Operation -- battery power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
92 -- 12 Operation -- external power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
92 -- 13 Power distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
92 -- 14 Protection of DC power system circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
92 -- 15 Troubleshooting -- DC power system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
92 -- 16 MAINTENANCE -- DC POWER SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
92 -- 17 Check and adjustment of generator voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
92 -- 18 Generator system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
92 -- 19 Starter--generators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
92 -- 20 Removal and installation -- starter--generators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
92 -- 20A Inspection and maintenance -- starter--generators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
92 -- 21 Voltage regulators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

CHAPTER 92
Page 1
MAINTENANCE MANUAL BO 105

Paragraph Title Page

92 -- 22 Removal and installation -- voltage regulators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71


92 -- 23 Inspection and maintenance -- voltage regulators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
92 -- 24 Functional test -- generator system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
92 -- 25 Battery power system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
92 -- 26 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
92 -- 27 Removal and installation -- battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
92 -- 28 Inspection and Maintenance -- battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
92 -- 29 Functional test -- battery power system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
92 -- 30 External power system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
92 -- 31 External power receptacle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
92 -- 32 Inspection and maintenance -- external power receptacle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
92 -- 33 Functional test -- external power system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
92 -- 33A Removal and installation -- EPU annunciator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
92 -- 34 Monitoring DC power system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
92 -- 34A Voltmeter and ammeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
92 -- 34B Generator failure warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
92 -- 34C External power engagement warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
92 -- 34D Generator overheat warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
92 -- 34E Battery temperature warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
92 -- 35 Battery temperature switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
92 -- 36 Removal and installation -- battery temperature switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
92 -- 37 Inspection and maintenance -- battery temperature switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
92 -- 38 Functional test -- DC power system monitoring equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
92 -- 39 STARTER AND IGNITION SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
92 -- 40 Locations -- starter and ignition system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
92 -- 41 Protection of circuits of starter and ignition system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
92 -- 42 Troubleshooting -- Starter and Ignition System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
92 -- 43 Inspection -- starter and ignition system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

CHAPTER 92 Revision 27
Page 2
MBB HELICOPTERS
MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB .B0 105

Paragraph Title Page

S t a r t e r s y s t e m .... . . . . . . . .
. . . . 101
.s t a r t e r system
F u n c t i o n a l test . . . . . . . . .
. . . . 105
I g n i t i o n s y s t e m .. . . . . . . . .
. . . . 107
.i g n i t i o n system .
F u n c t i o n a l test . . . . . . . .
. . . . 108
ENGINE AND MAIN TRANSMISSION SYSTEMS . . . . . . .
. . . . 109
Locations .engine and main t r a n s m i s s i o n systems .
. . . . 110
P r o t e c t i o n of engine and main t r a n s m i s s i o n systems . . . . 112
M o n i t o r i n g s y s t e m s . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
RPM monitoring .engines and r o t o r . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
RPM warning N I and NR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
N2 overspeed warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Troubleshooting .RPM monitoring, e n g i n e s and r o t o r . . . . 122
F u n c t i o n a l t e s t .RPM monitoring, e n g i n e s and r o t o r . . . . 124
Chipdetectorsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
O i l p r e s s u r e monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Temperaturemonitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
N 2 G o v e r n o r . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

Troubleshooting .N2 governor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139


F u n c t i o n a l t e s t .N 2 governor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
E n g i n e a n t i - i c i n g s y s t e m . . . . . . . 142
Troubleshooting .engine a n t i - i c i n g system . . . . . . . . 146
F u n c t i o n a l test .engine a n t i - i c i n g system . . . . . . . . 146
E n g i n e f i r e d e t e c t i o n s y s t e m . . . 147
Troubleshooting .engine f i r e d e t e c t i o n System . . . . . . . 151

B0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 3
MAINTENANCE MANUAL B 0 105

Paragraph Title Page

Functional test .engine fire detection system ...................................


Removal and installation.engine fire detection system ..........................
Oil cooler fan failure waming system .......................................
Troubleshooting.oil cooler fan failure warning system ...........................
Functional test .oil cooler fan failure warning system ............................
Removal and installation. oil cooler fan failure waming system ...................
FUEL SYSTEM .............................................................
Locations .fuel system .....................................................
Protection of circuits of fuel system ............................................
Fuel supply system ........................................................
Troubleshooting.fuel supply system ..........................................
Functional test .fuel supply system ...........................................
Fuel shutoff system ........................................................
Troubleshooting.fuel shutoff system ..........................................
Functional test . fuel shutoff system ...........................................
Leakage test . fuel shutoff system .............................................
Monitoring .
fuel supply system ............................................
Low fuel warning system ....................................................
Differentialfuel pressure (BYPASS) waming system .............................
CONTROL SYSTEMS .......................................................
Locations .control systems ..................................................
Protection of circuits of control systems ........................................

CHAPTER 92 Revision 21
Page 4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL B 0 105

Paragraph Title Page

92 .
90 Hydraulic system .......................................................... 1i7
Hydraulic pressure monitoring system ..........................................
Electrically initiated system switch-over .hydraulic system .......................
Cyclic stick trim ...........................................................
Troubleshooting.cyclic stick trim .............................................
Functional test .cyclic stick trim ..............................................
Cyclic stick grip ...........................................................
Removal and installation .cyclic stick grip ......................................
four-way beeper switch 2CC ..........................
Removal and installation .
Removal and installation .P T button 14RT .....................................
Removal and installation .push button switch ..................................
Control unit on collective pitch stick ........................................
Removal and installation .components of control unit on collective pitch stick .......
Removal and installation .four-way switch (8KA) and
switches 11MF, 20LA. 24LA and 2MD .........................................
Removal and installation .switch 13MF ........................................
LlGHTlNG SYSTEMS .......................................................
92 .106 Locations .lighting systems .................................................. 205
92 .107 Protection of lighting systems ................................................. 206
92 .
108 Position light system ...................................................... 207
92 .109 Troubleshooting.position lights .............................................. 207
92 .110 lnspection and maintenance . position lights .................................... 208
92 .111 Removal and installation .position lights ....................................... 211
92 .112 Removal and Installation .tail light ............................................ 212

Revision 22 CHAPTER 92
Page 5
MBB HELICOPTERS
MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB .B0 105

Paragraph Title Page


92 .113 Functional test .position light system . . . . . . . . . . 215
92-114 A n t i - c o l l i s i o n l i g h t s y s t e m . . . . 215
92 .115 Troubleshooting .anti-collision light system . . . . . . . 219
92 .116 Inspection for condition .anti-collision lights 4LA, 5LA . . 220
92 .117 Removal and installation .anti-collision light system . 221
92 .118 Removal and installation .anti-collision light 4LA . . . . . 221
Removal and installation .anti-collision light 5LA . . . . . 222
Removal and installation .flasher unit 21LA . . . . . . . 224
Functional test .anti-collision lighting . . . . . . . . . 224
I n t e r n a 1 l i g h t i n g s y s t e m . . . . . . . . 225
Troubleshooting .internal lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Inspection and maintenance .internal lighting . . . . . . 229
Removal and installation .internal lighting . . . . . . . . 229
Functional test .internal lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
I n s t r u m e n t l i g h t i n g .......... . 231
Troubleshooting .instrument lighting . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Removal and installation .eyebrow lights and post lights . . 235
92 .130 Removal and installation .light control unit 9LC . . . . . 236
92 .131 Removal and installation .potentiometer lOLC . . . . . . . 237
92 .132 Functional test .instrument lighting . . . . . . . . . . . 238
92-133 Warning l i g h t s e g m e n t s . . . . . . . . . 238

B 0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 6
MBB HELICOPTERS
MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB - B0 105

Paragraph Title Page


92-133A MISCELLANEOUS ELECTRICAL
SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
92-134 P i t o t t u b e h e a t i n g . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
92 - 135 Troubleshooting - p i t o t tube heating . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
92 - 136 Functional t e s t - p i t o t tube heating . . . . . . . . . . . 242
92-137 O v e r h e a d p a n e l 12VE . . . . . . :. . . . 243
92-138 C e n t e r p a n e l . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

B 0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 7 / 8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL BO 105

92 -- 1 GENERAL
The electrical systems of the helicopter BO 105 are:

-- DC power system

-- Starter and ignition system

-- Engine and main transmission systems

-- Fuel system

-- Control systems

-- Lighting system

-- Miscellaneous electrical systems


Troubleshoot in conjunction with the Wiring Diagram Manual (WDM)

NOTE With post SB BO105--90--102 fuses can be replaced by circuit breakers.


4A and 6,3A fuses be replaced by 5A circuit breakers, if they are connected with
AWG22 wire.
6,3A fuses be replaced by 7,5A circuit breakers, if they are connected with AWG10
to AWG20 wires.

92 -- 2 Common electrical components of the electrical systems


The common electrical components are installed in the following equipment as shown in figures
92LEERER MERKER to 92--2:

-- Main relay box 1VE (see figures 92--4 thru 92--6)

-- Instrument panel 2VE (see chapter 91)

-- Relay box 10VE (see paragraph 92--6)

-- Overhead panel 12VE (see chapter 92--137)

-- Center panel (see paragraph 92--138)

-- External power receptacle 2P (see paragraph 92--31)

92 -- 3 Removal and installation -- common electrical components

NOTE Perform maintenance with proper tools, using antimagnetic ones if necessary.
Blank off plugs with protective caps. Insulate wire ends with electrical tape and in-
spect solder connections for integrity.

1. Removal

a. Pull all circuit breakers and set all switches to OFF.

b. Remove battery connector 1P and secure against inadvertent reconnection.

Revision 26 CHAPTER 92
Page 9
MAINTENANCE MANUAL BO 105

c. Remove attaching hardware.

d. If necessary, identify wiring to aid reconnection.

e. Remove component.

2. Installation

a. Install new component using attaching hardware.

b. Connect wiring or electrical connectors (safety as necessary).

92 -- 4 Inspection -- common electrical components

1. Inspect electrical wiring for correct routeing, security, damage, and evidence of overheating or burns.

-- repair, reroute or secure wiring.

2. Inspect electrical terminals for corrosion, looseness and damage.

-- remove corrosion, tighten or replace terminals.

3. Inspect all bonding jumpers for condition.

-- repair or replace.

4. Disconnect plugs and inspect contact pins for condition. Visually inspect shrink sleeves for porosity.

-- replace corroded or damaged pins, replace shrink sleeve or plug.

5. Visually inspect shock mounts for damage.

-- replace shock mounts.

6. Inspect parts for security, damage, corrosion and burns.

-- tighten or replace parts, remove corrosion.

CHAPTER 92
Page 10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL BO 105

BO105_WAH_1483_R
4 1

EFFECTIVITY
5
Series A, C, D 3 4 2 1
S/N 7 -- 160

5
1

1 Engine 1
Emergency bus relais 40P
Starter generator 103P, 203P Battery switch 16P
2 Main Relay Box 1VE 2 Generator control switch 117P, 217P
2 Voltage regulator 104P, 204P 1 Generator control switch 118P, 218P
1 Voltage regulator 108P, 208P Voltmeter 18P
Power supply relay 8P Ammeter 19P
2 Reverse--current relay 105P, 205P Generator failure
2
Generator relay 109P, 209P warning light 23P
1 Generator relay 107P, 207P 1 Emerg. DC Bus
110P, 210P pushbutton indicator 41P
Shunt 21P, 22P Ammeter selector
Circuit breaker 128P, 228P switch 24P
Fuse / circuit breaker 33P, 34P EPU ON indicator
35P, 36P, 29P light 27P
1 Fuse / circuit breaker 39P Shunt 20P
Generator control-- Auxiliary relay 26P
relay 106P, 206P Fuse / circuit breaker 11P, 25P
1 Diode 112P, 212P, 30P, 32P,
111P, 211P 1 Fuse / circuit breaker 13P, 38P
Starter bus PP1 Main bus PP21
3 Instrument Panel 2VE Auxiliary bus PP22
Battery 1P 1 Emergency bus PP20
External power 4 Overhead Panel 12VE
receptacle 2P
1
Generator field
External power relay 7P cutout switch 104P, 204P
Battery relay 6P 5 Relay Box 10VE
Auxiliary bus relay 10P

1 EFFECTIVITY D series only 2 EFFECTIVITY A and C series only

Figure 92--1 Electrical equipment location

Revision 26 CHAPTER 92
Page 11
MAINTENANCE MANUAL BO 105

EFFECTIVITY 3

Series A, C,
S/N 161 and subsequent

3 4 2 1
BO105_WAH_1484_R

1 Engine 3 Instrument Panel 2VE


Starter generator 103P, 203P Battery 1P
2 Main Relay Box 1VE External power
Voltage regulator 104P, 204P receptacle 2P
Reverse--current relay 105P, 205P Battery relay 6P
Power supply relay 8P External relay 7P
Generator relay 109P, 209P Battery master switch 16P
Shunt 21P, 22P Starter--generator
Circuit breaker 128P, 228P control switch 117P, 217P
Fuse / circuit breaker 33P, 34P, 35P Voltmeter 18P
29P, 36P, 37P Ammeter 19P
Generator control relay 106P, 206P Generator warning
Starter bus PP1 light 23P
Ammeter selector
switch 24P
EPU ON indicator
light 27P
1 EFFECTIVITY Optional
Shunt 20P
emergency bus
Fuse / circuit breaker 11P, 25P, 30P
31P, 32P
1 Fuse / circuit breaker 13P
1 ENERG. DC BUS
pushbutton indicator 15P
Auxiliary bus relay 10P
Main bus PP21
Auxiliary bus PP22
1 Emergency bus PP20
1 Emergency bus relay 14P
4 Relay Box 10VE

Figure 92--2 Electrical equipment location

CHAPTER 92 Revision 26
Page 12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL BO 105

EFFECTIVITY
Series S

BO105_WAH_1485_R
4

3 5 2 1
4

1 Engine Battery
Starter generator 103P, 203P master switch 16P
2 Main Relay Box 1VE Starter--generator
Voltage regulator 104P, 204P control switch 117P, 217P
Reverse--current relay 105P, 205P Voltmeter 18P
Power supply relay 8P Ammeter 19P
Generator relay 109P, 209P Generator warning
Shunt 21P, 22P light 23P
Circuit breaker 128P, 228P Ammeter selector
Fuse / circuit breaker 33P, 34P switch 24P
35P, 36P EPU ON indicator
Generator control relay 106P, 206P light 27P
Starter bus PP1 Shunt 20P
3 Instrument Panel 2VE Fuse / circuit breaker 30P, 31P, 32P
External power 25P, 26P
receptacle 2P Main bus PP21
External power Auxiliary bus PP22
relay 7P Starter relay 103J, 203J
Auxiliary bus relay 10P 4 Engine Deck (aft right)
Battery 1P
Battery relay 6P
Strip fuse 5P
5 Relay Box 10VE

Figure 92--3 Electrical equipment location

Revision 26 CHAPTER 92
Page 13
MAINTENANCE MANUAL BO 105

92 -- 5 Main relay box 1VE


The main relay box 1VE is installed in the aft RH side of the cargo compartment (see figures 92--1 to 92--3).
The following components of the main relay box are accessible after removal of the cover.

-- voltage regulator 104P, 204P, 108P and 208P

-- generator relays 107P, 109P, 207P, 209P, 110P and 210P

-- generator control relay 106P, 206P

-- reverse--current relay 105P, 205P

-- power supply relay 8P

-- circuit breaker 128P, 228P

-- junction box 1VV

-- diodes 111P, 112P, 211P, 212P

-- shunts 21P, 22P, 129P

-- fuses or circuit breakers 29P, 33P, 34P, 35P, 36P, 37P, 38P, 39P

-- starter bus PP1


As shown in figures 92--4 thru 92--7, the configuration of the main relay box 1VE varies with the helicopter series
A, C, D and S.

CHAPTER 92 Revision 26
Page 14
MBB HELICOPTERS
-
MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB B0 105

EFFECTIVITY

Series A, C
S/N 181 and subsequent

Figure 92-4 Main relay box 1VE

B0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 15/16
MBB HELICOPTERS
-
MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB B 0 105

EFFECTIVITY

Series A, C
-
S/N 81 180

Figure 92-5 Main relay box 1VE

B0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 17
MBB HELICOPTERS
-
MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB B0 105

EFFECTIVITY

Series A, C, S
S/N 7 - 80

Figure 92-6 Main relay box 1VE

B0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 18
MBB HELICOPTERS
MAINTENANCE MANDAL MBB - B 0 105

EFFECTIVITY

S e r i e s A, C, D
S/N 7 - 160

F i g u r e 92-7 Main relay box 1VE

B 0 105
CHAPTER 9 2
Page 1 9
.MBB HELICOPTERS'
MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB -
B 0 105

92 -6 Relay box lOVE


The relay box lOVE i s i n s t a l l e d i n t h e front end of t h e nose s h e l l , on t h e
l e f t side below the cabin f l o o r (see figures 92-1 t o 92-3).
Access t o t h e components of t h e relay box i s obtained by opening t h e nose
door (see figures 92-8 and 92-9).

The following components a r e i n s t a l l e d :


1. For N2 governor:

- relays 4KA, 5KA and 6KA


- diode matrix l O K A
2. For cyclic s t i c k trim:
- retraction relays 8CC, l O C C
- extension relays 9CC, l l C C
3. Additional relays can be i n s t a l l e d f o r optional equipments.

B0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 20
MBB HELICOPTERS
-
MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB B0 105

Figure 92-8 Relay box lOVE

B0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 21
MBB HELICOPTERS
MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB -B0 105

EFFECTIVITY

S/N 101 and subsequent and series D

Figure 92-9 Relay box lOVE

B0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 22
MBB HELICOPTERS
MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB - B0 105
92 - 7 DC POWER SYSTEM

1. General

The DC power system (see figure 92-10) mainly consists of the following:
- generator system
- battery system
- external power receptacle
- monitoring system

In order t o produce and d i s t r i b u t e dc power t o the e l e c t r i c a l loads, the


e l e c t r i c a l system must include relays, controls and busses.
Engines 1 and 2 are s t a r t e d one a f t e r t h e other by means of two s t a r t e r -
generators. Voltage i s supplied by t h e airborne battery or by an external
power source.
When an engine has reached i d l e speed, i t s associated starter-generator
w i l l produce power for t h e e l e c t r i c a l system. Each starter-generator i s
connected t o a voltage regulator which maintains a constant generator
output voltage. The connected loads a r e supplied via t h e busses.
System voltage and current consumption a r e indicated by the voltmeter and
ammeter respectively, i n s t a l l e d i n t h e horizontal section of the
instrument panel (see figures 92-11 t h r u 92-13 and chapter 9 1 ) .
Both generators and the airborne battery can be switched on and off and
the generator f i e l d s s t i l l activated can be switched off. The consumers
a r e protected by c i r c u i t breakers (see paragraph 92-14).

Warning l i g h t s are used t o warn of generator failure, overheating of the


airborne battery and overheating of the starter-generators (D s e r i e s
.
only) Utilization of external power i s a l s o indicated.
2. Technical data
a . Airborne battery (See VARTA Maintenance Manual)
- nominal voltage 2 4V
- nominal capacity 25 Ah
- design 20 c e l l s (nickel-cadniium)
- max. permissible discharge 800 A
- manufacturer VARTA

B 0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 23
.MBB HELICOPTERS
-
'

MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB B0 105

EXTERNAL POWER
RECEPTACLE ' . BATTERY

10 0 =:
-
9 9
I
1
!
1
VOLTAGE !
REGULATOR REGULATOR j
4)
I
I

- - - - -1
I
I
I

I
I
I
I

STARTER BUS
1
W

MAlN BUS
I
1--L + * PP20
EMERGENCY BUS

AUXlLlARY BUS

$3

A EFFECTIVITY
- -

D series or when the optional emergency bus is installed

Figure 92-10 DC Power Supply (General)


B0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 24
MBB HELICOPTERS
MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB B 0 105 -
b . ~ t a r t e r - g e n e r a t o r (see LEAR SIEGLER Maintenance Manual)
- nominal voltage 2 8V
- nominal c u r r e n t 150A
- nominal power 4,5 kW
- permissible current
consumption a t S t a r t : 200 ....700A a t 23V
- manuf a c t u r e r Lear S i e g l e r
C. Voltage r e g u l a t o r ( s e e LEAR SLEGLER Maintenance Manual)
- a d j u s t i n g range . .
27 . . . . 28,OV
- a d j u s t e d voltage 27,5V t 0.lV
- design DC v o l t a g e r e g u l a t o r with pro-
t e c t i o n and monitoring function
- manuf a c t u r e r Lear S i e g l e r

92 -8 Component l o c a t i o n - DC power system

LOCATION FIGURE

S t a r t e r - g e n e r a t o r s 103P, Engine 1 and 2


203P ( s e e chapter 61)
Airborne b a t t e r y 1 P Nose s e c t i o n , forward of 92-1 t o 92-3
t h e instrument panel 2VE

External power r e c e p t a c l e 2P Nose s e c t i o n 92-1 t o 92-3

DC power system c o n t r o l s Instrument panel 2VE 92-1 t o 92-3


I n d i c a t o r s (voltmeter 18P Instrument panel 2VE 92-1 t o 92-3
and ammeter 19P) ( s e e chapter 91) 92-11 t o 92-13

Warning l i g h t s Instrument panel 2VE,


v e r t i c a l section (see
chapter 92-133)
S t a r t e r bus P P 1 S e r i e s C, D, S, IFR 92-4 t o 92-7
Main r e l a y box 1VE

Table 92-1 Component l o c a t i o n - DC power system (1 of 2)

B0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 25
MBB HELICOPTERS
MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB B0 105 -

COMPONENT LOCATION FIGURE

Emergency bus PP20 -


S e r i e s D, S/N 7 160 92-1
Main r e l a y box 1VE
S e r i e s A, C S/N 161 and subsq. 92-2
Optional equipment, main
r e l a y box 1VE
Main bus PP21 S e r i e s A, C, D, S 92-1 t o 92-3
Main r e l a y box 1VE
A u x i l i a r y bus PP22 S e r i e s A, C, D, S 92-1 t o 92-3
Instrument p a n e l 2VE
Shunts 20P, 21P, 22P S e r i e s At C, D, S 92-1 t o 92-3
Main r e l a y box 1VE
Voltage r e g u l a t o r Main r e l a y box 1VE 92-4 t o 92-7
104P, 204P, 108P and 208P
Generator r e l a y s 107P, Main r e l a y box 1VE 92-4 t o 92-7
109P, 207P, 209P, llOP, 210P

Circuit breakers See paragraph 92-14


Fuse 25P (300A) S e r i e s C, D 92-1
Instrument panel 2VE
Fuse 5 P (300A) Series S
Below t h e engines
next t o b a t t e r y
F l i g h t e s s e n t i a l bus S e r i e s A, C, D and S 92-1 t o 92-3
r e l a y 10P Instrument panel 2VE
B a t t e r y r e l a y 6P S e r i e s At C, D, S/N 7 160 - 92-1
S e r i e s A, C S/N 161 and subsq. 92-2
Instrument p a n e l 2VE
Series S 92-3
Engine deck, a f t r i g h t
E x t e r n a l power r e l a y 7P S e r i e s A, C, D S/N 7 -
160 92-1
S e r i e s At C S/N 161 and subsq. 92-2
Series S 92-3
Instrument p a n e l 2VE
J u n c t i o n box 1W S e r i e s Al C, D, S
Main r e l a y box

Table 92-1 Component l o c a t i o n - DC power systern (2 of 2)

B 0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 26
MBB HELICOPTERS
-
MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB B0 105

EFFECTIVITY

Figure 92-11 Instrument Panel 2VE (Horizontal Section)


B0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 27/28
MBB HELICOPTERS
-
MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB B0 105

EFFECTIVITY S/N 161 and subsequent

Figure 92-12 Instrument Panel 2VE (Horizontal Section)

B0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 29
MBB HELICOPTERS'
MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB - B0 105

EFFECTIVITY Series D

Figure 92-13 Instrument Panel 2VE (Horizontal Section)

B0 105
CPMTER 92
Page 30
MBB HELICOPTBRS
MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB B0 105 -
92 -9 DC power system c o n t r o l s

1. General

The switches of t h e DC power system a r e l o c a t e d on t h e lower RH s i d e of


t h e instrument panel 2VE ( s e e f i g u r e s 92-11 t o 92-13).
The DC power system i s c o n t r o l l e d by t h e following switches:
- b a t t e r y switch, l a b e l l e d BATTERY MAST SWITCH (S/N 7 -
160), BAT EPU
(S/N 161 and subsq.) and BATTERY MASTER ( S e r i e s D ) ,
- EMERG. DC - BUS pushbutton i n d i c a t o r (only S/N 161 and subsq. and
S e r i e s D)
- generator switch, l a b e l l e d ENG. I and ENG. I1 STARTER-GENERATOR
-
(S/N 7 160), START STARTER-GENERATOR (S/N 161 and subsq.) and ENG.
I and ENG. I1 GENERATOR ( S e r i e s D ) .

2. Battery switch BATTERY MAST SWITCH; BAT EPU; BATTERY MASTER


This 2-pole t o g g l e switch has t h e p o s i t i o n s EPU ONIBATT OFF and EPU
OFF/BATT ON.
I n t h e EPU ON/BATT OFF p o s i t i o n (see f i g u r e s 92-16 and 92-17), t h e
p o s i t i v e terminal of t h e b a t t e r y i s disconnected, and t h e s t a r t e r bus P P 1
and main bus PP21 a r e connected t o t h e p o s i t i v e t e r m i n a l of e x t e r n a l
power r e c e p t a c l e 2P. Simultaneously, t h e EPU ON Segment w i l l i l l u m i n a t e
on Al C and S s e r i e s , S/N 161 and subsequent, and on S/N 7 t h r u 160.
I n t h e $PU OFF/BATT ON p o s i t i o n , t h e b a t t e r y switch energizes b a t t e r y
r e l a y 6P and a u x i l i a r y r e l a y 26P. I n t u r n , e x t e r n a l power r e l a y 7P
de-energizes and disconnects t h e p o s i t i v e terminal of e x t e r n a l power
r e c e p t a c l e 2P from s t a r t e r bus P P 1 and main bus PP21 ( s e e f i g u r e s 92-14
t h r u 92-18).
During generator operation, power from t h e generators w i l l charge t h e
b a t t e r y . I n t h e event of t h e i r f a i l u r e , t h e b a t t e r y w i l l supply t h e buses
(except f o r a u x i l i a r y bus) with power.

3. EMERG. DC - BUS pushbutton i n d i c a t o r 41P (D s e r i e s o r o p t i o n a l equipment)

I n p o s i t i o n ON (push button depressed), t h e emergency bus r e l a y 40P


(S/N 7 - 160 and s e r i e s D ) and emergency bus r e l a y 1 4 P (S/N 161 and
subsequent, and s e r i e s S) a r e energized, t h u s connecting t h e p o s i t i v e
t e r m i n a l of a i r c r a f t b a t t e r y 1 P t o emergency bus PP20 ( s e e f i g u r e s 92-19
t h r u 92-21). A l l o t h e r busses a r e disconnected.
I n p o s i t i o n OFF (switch r e l e a s e d ) , t h e emergency o p e r a t i n g mode i s
switched off .
4. Generator switch ENG I (ENG 11) STARTER~GENERATOR; START STARTER-
GENERATOR; ENG I (ENG 11) GENERATOR.

This switch i s used t o connect o r disconnect generator 1 and 2 t o o r from


t h e h e l i c o p t e r e l e c t r i c a l system. However, connection i s only p o s s i b l e i f
t h e r e s p e c t i v e g e n e r a t o r i s operating.

B 0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 31
MBB HELICOPTERS
MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB B0 105 -

I
AUXlLlARY BUS I MAlN BUS STARTER BUS
PP21 28V

900219

Figure 92-14 Connection of e x t e r n a l power t o t h e l i n e


B0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 32
MBB HELICOPTERS
-
MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB B0 105

Figure 92-15 Connection of external power t o the l i n e


B0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 33
MBB HELICOPTERS'
MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB B0 105 -

EFFECTIVITY

EXTERNAL POWER-
' RECEPTACLE 2P
, >

L
n
+ + -
BATTERY 1P BATTERY MASTER

-- W I
0
m

[--:C2
A
V

BATTERY

RELAY 6P
--
m
- S

AUXlLlARY

RELAY 26P
m - - - -

EXTERNAL
POWER
RELAY ?P

.
-------
EMERGENCY BUS
-- -I
L-'- -- -28V---'-D
PP20

STARTERBUS MAlN BUS

EFFECTIVITY
Series D

Figure 92-16 Connection of battery to the line

B0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 34
MBB HELICOPTERS
MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB - B0 105

EFFECTIVITY

S/N 161 and subsequent

A EFFECTIVITY

With o p t i o n a l emergency bus I n s t a l l e d

Figure 92-17 Connection of b a t t e r y t o t h e l i n e

B 0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 35
MBB HELICOPTERS
MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB B0 105 -

Series S

BATTERY
MASTER EXTERNAL POWER-
BATTERY 1P SWITCH 16P RECEPTACLE 2P

T EMERGENCY BUS

STARTER BUS MAlN BUS

A EFFECTIVITY

With o p t i o n a l emergency bus i n s t a l l e d

Figure 92-18 Connection of b a t t e r y t o t h e l i n e


B0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 36
MBB HELICOPTERS
MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB B0 105 -

EFFECTIVITY

- r
* r

BATTERY
MASTER SWlTCH 16P

INDICATOR LIGHT 27P

1lP

FUSE

!
EMERGENCY BUS

PP21
MAlN BUS

-- -
W
L

STARTER BUS
EXTERNAL POWER
BATTERY 1P
-
RECEDTACLE 2p

I'* .T
FUSE i

+* I A

+- I I
FUSE 30P *I 1' BATTERY
RELAY 8P
"
EXTERNAL POWER-
RELAY 7P
I B6

Figure 92-19 Application o f power t o emergency bus

B0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 37
'MBB HELICOPTERS'
MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB - B0 105

EFFECTIVITY

S/N 1 6 1 and subsequent

EXTERNAL POWER-
RECEPTACLE
BATTERY 1P
BATTERY
RELAY 6P
41

r -
V
A rn

EMERG. 14P
BUSBAR
0
PUSH- B U l l O N
SWlTCH 15P
FUSE
30P
RELAY
----- 4 4B
EXTERNAL
POWER-
RELAY 7P
0 b lo

--
0

U)

BATTERY

REVERSE CURRENT INDICATOR


RELAY LIGHT 27P

EXTERNAL POWER
RECEPTACLE 2P

STARTER BUS

EMERGENCY BUS MAIN-BUS

--
I STARTERIGENERATOR
CONTROL SWiTCH
-
I

GEN. - ANL.
106P
GENERATOR CONTROL RELAY
VOLTMETER 18P

-
--

Figure 92-20 A p p l i c a t i o n o f power t o emergency bus

B0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 38
MBB HELICOPTERS
-
MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB B0 105

EFFECTIVITY
Series S

EXTERNAL POWER-
RECEPTACLE

REVERSECURRENT

GENERATORCONTROLRELAY

-N
. ANL.

Figure 92-21 Application of power to emergency bus


B0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 39/40
MBB HELICOPTERS
MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB - B0 105

EFFECTIVITY o S/N 7 - 80
The generator switch has three positions marked GEN,
OFF (center position) and START.
The position START i s spring-loaded and safetied
w i t h a Cover against inadvertent activation.

o S/N 81 and subsequent


The generator switch has three positions marked GEN (or
GEN ON), OFF (cent.er position) and START.
The position START i s spring-loaded and protected
against inadvertent activation by a mechanical stop,
which may be released by pulling the toggle.

o Series Al C, S
With the engine running and t h e generator switch s e t t o
position GEN or GEN ON, t h e voltage supplied by the
generator i s fed t o the reverse-current relay via t h e
generator switch and the energized generator control
relay. I f t h e generator voltage exceeds the battery
voltage by 0.35V t o 0.65V, the reverse current-relay w i l l
connect the generator t o t h e main bus.

o Series D
With the engine running and t h e generator switch s e t t o
position GEN or GEN ON, t h e voltage supplied by the
generator i s fed t o the voltage regulator via the
generator switch and the generator f i e l d cutout switch.
I f the voltage exceeds t h e battery voltage by 0.35 t o
0.65V, t h e generator relay w i l l connect the generator t o
t h e main bus.

92 - 10 Generator operation
1. Both generators operating (see figure 92-22 t o 92-24)

Under normal operating conditions the DC power system i s supplied by both


generators. After t h e generators have b u i l t up t h e required voltage, they
a r e connected t o the helicopter e l e c t r i c a l system as described i n para-
graph 92-9.4. The two red warning l i g h t s GEN 1 and GEN 2, i n s t a l l e d i n
the instrument panel 1VE ( v e r t i c a l section, figure 92-97), then extin-
guish. The voltage regulators provide f o r equal d i s t r i b u t i o n of the
load between both generators. A l l busses are supplied w i t h power ( r e f e r
t o paragraph 92-13 for power d i s t r i b u t i o n ) .
Battery power can also be connected t o the e l e c t r i c a l system thru battery
switch BATTERY MAST SWITCH, BAT EPU, or BATTERY MASTER (depending on
e f f e c t i v i t y ) . The battery w i l l be charged and, i f both generators should
f a i l , w i l l immediately provide battery power t o the system ( r e f e r t o
Operation-battery power, paragraph 92-11).

B0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 4 1
MBB HELICOPTERS
MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB - B0 105
a. Connecting t h e generators t o t h e l i n e

NOTE o The methods of activation and operation of the No.1 and


No.2 generators are t h e Same f o r both generators.
o For S/N 7 thru 80, t h e a u x i l i a r y bus i s automatically
energized when one generator i s connected t o the l i n e .
o For S/N 81 and subsequent, power supply t o the aux-
i l i a r y bus i s ensured only a f t e r both generators
have been connected t o t h e l i n e .
o Battery master switch s e t t o position EPU OFF-BATT
ON (ON position f o r D s e r i e s ) .

o Series A, C, S only
After generator control switch 1 1 7 P (217P) i s Set i n
position GEN ON or GEN, t h e generator voltage i s routed
t o t h e excitation winding of t h e generator control
relay 106P (206P). The r e l a y w i l l close, thereby
routing the generator voltage v i a closed contact of
t h e power supply relay 8P t o t h e terminal SW of t h e
reverse-current relay 105P (205P). When the generator
voltage exceeds the b a t t e r y voltage by 0.35 t o 0.65V,
t h e reverse-current relay routes t h e generator voltage
t o t h e helicopter e l e c t r i c a l system.
Closing of t h e reverse-current r e l a y energizes t h e
r e l a t e d generator relay 109P (209P) and i n t e r r u p t s the
c i r c u i t t o the generator f a i l u r e warning l i g h t 23P.
o S/N 7 - 80, s e r i e s A, C, S
Via a contact of the energized generator relay 109P
(209P), the a u x i l i a r y bus interconnect relay i s ener-
gized allowing t h e a u x i l i a r y bus PP22 t o be supplied
w i t h voltage .

o S/N 81 and subsequent, s e r i e s At C, S


Via a contact of t h e energized r e l a y 109P (209P),
voltage i s routed t o t h e contact, connected i n s e r i e s ,
of t h e energized relay 209P (109P). A s soon a s both
contacts are closed (both generators a r e connected t o
t h e l i n e ) , t h e auxiliary bus r e l a y i s energized,
allowing the a u x i l i a r y bus PP22 t o be supplied w i t h
power.

B 0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 42
MBB HELICOPTERS
MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB B0 105 -
tsee 92-31
I POWER SUPPLY RELAY 8P
EFFECTIVITY

S e r i e s A, C
S/N 7 - 80

---
REGULATOR

RELAY 105P

Figure 92-22 Connection of g e n e r a t o r s t o t h e l i n e

B0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 43
.MBB HELICOPTERS'
-
MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB B 0 105

I POWER SUPPLY RELAY 8P EFFECTIVITY


Series A, C, S
S/N 81 and sub-
sequent

EQUALlZlNG LlNE

CONTROL

GEN ON

VOLTAGE
REGULATOR REGULATOR 204P
<

GENERATOR
103P

-- REVERSECURRENT
RELAY 105P
REVERSECURRENT -
RELAY 205P AUXlLlARY BUS
RELAY 10P

Figure 92-23 Connection of generators t o the l i n e


B 0 105
C W T E R 92
Page 44
MBB HELICOPTERS
MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB - B0 105

EFFECTIVITY
-

Series D
GENERATOR CONTROL SWlTCH

ST

AUXlLlARY BUS

GENERATOR

s. Starter rnd lgnition System

Figure 92-24 Connection of generators t o the l i n e

B0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 45
MBB HELICOPTERS
MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB - B0 105
o Series D
After generator control switch 118P (218P) i s Set i n
position GEN ON or GEN, generator voltage i s routed
via t h e EMERG. DC BUS pushbutton indicator 41P and
both t h e voltage regulator 108P (208P) and t h e
normally closed contact of t h e power supply relay 8P
back t o the voltage regulator. .

When the generator voltage exceeds the battery


voltage by 0.35 t o 0.65V, the voltage regulator
routes the energizing voltage t o the generator relay
107P (207P) and the generator voltage i s connected t o
t h e helicopter e l e c t r i c a l system.
Simultaneously, the generator relay l l O P (210P) i s
energized. A contact of the energized dual-pole relay
i s interrupted, causing the generator f a i l u r e warning
l i g h t 23P t o extinguish.

~ h esecond contact connected i n s e r i e s w i t h generator


relay 210P ( l l O P ) i s closed when generator 2 i s
connected t o t h e l i n e , thereby energizing t h e
auxiliary bus relay 10P. The relay closes allowing
auxiliary bus PP22 t o be energized.
b. Operation of the generators i n p a r a l l e l

EFFECTIVITY o Series A, C, S
When both generators are connected t o the l i n e , the
equalizing c i r c u i t of the voltage regulator 1 0 4 P and
204P i s closed via generator control relay 106P and
206P, which a r e connected i n series. The voltage
regulators now ensure an equal load sharing between
the generators .

o Series D
When both generators a r e connected t o l i n e , t h e
equalizing c i r c u i t of t h e voltage regulators 108P and
208P i s closed. The voltage regulators now provide
f o r an equal load sharing between the generators.
C. Disconnecting the generators from the l i n e
The generator i s manually disconnected from the s t a r t e r bus by s e t t i n g
t h e starter-generator control switch t o OFF (center position).
The generator i s disconnected automatically by the corresponding reverse-
current relay when the generator voltage drops below a certain
value .
EFFECTIVITY Series D
The generator i s disconnected automatically by the
corresponding generator relay 107P (207P) when the
generator voltage drops below a certain value.
B 0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 46
MBB HELICOPTERS
MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB - B0 105
In a l l cases the corresponding generator f a i l u r e warning Segment w i l l
illuminate t o indicate t h e disconnection or f a i l u r e of the generator.

2. Single generator operation.


I f a generator f a i l s or i s disconnected, main bus PP21 w i l l continue t o
be supplied with power.
A l l equipment and Systems e s s e n t i a l t o normal helicopter operation,
a r e connectedto t h e main bus P P 2 1 (see figure 92-25). In case one
generator should f a i l , t h e e l e c t r i c a l power produced by the second
generator i s s u f f i c i e n t t o meet a l l of the loads.

EFFECTIVITY o Series D or when the optional emergency bus i s


i n s t a l l e d . Should both generators f a i l , t h e main bus
may be disconnected by pressing t h e EMERG. DC BUS
pushbutton indicator. The ernergency bus i s then
supplied w i t h e l e c t r i c a l power from the battery. For
connected loads,
See figure 92-25.

~ u x i l i a r ybus

The auxiliary bus PP22 i s supplied with e l e c t r i c a l power during the


following System operating modes:
a. EPU operation

EFFECTIVITY o Series A, C (S/N 7 - 80)


b. Single generator operation and dual generator operation

EFFECTIVITY o Series D and s e r i e s A, C, S


S/N 81 and subsequent

C. Dual generator operation only


For connected loads, See figure 92-25.

B0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 47
,MBB HELICOPTERS
MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB - B0 105

Emergency bus

EFFECTIVITY o S e r i e s D o r when o p t i o n a l emergency bus i s i n s t a l l e d .

The emergency bus PP20 i s supplied with e l e c t r i c a l power during


operation of any of t h e t h r e e power supply sources.
I n case both generators should f a i l , b a t t e r y power i s supplied t o
a l l v i t a l equipment through t h e emergency bus.
The b a t t e r y i s a c t i v a t e d a s an emergency power source v i a EMERG. DC
BUS pushbutton i n d i c a t o r 41P (S/N 7 - 160 and s e r i e s D) o r 15P (S/N 161
and subsequent, and s e r i e s S) and emergency bus r e l a y 40P (S/N 7 -
160
and s e r i e s D) o r 1 4 P (S/N 161 and subsequent, and s e r i e s S ) ,
respectively, which i l l u m i n a t e s a s soon a s t h e emergency bus i s energized
( r e f e r t o f i g u r e s 92-19 t h r u 92-21).

NOTE With EMERG DC BUS pushbutton i n d i c a t o r depressed, n e i t h e r t h e


generators nor an e x t e r n a l power source can be connected t o t h e
e l e c t r i c a l system.

92 - 11 Operation - battery power (see f i g u r e s 92-16 t o 92-18)


A s t h e b a t t e r y has a l i m i t e d capacity, it i s only used as a power source f o r
s t a r t i n g t h e engines (see paragraph 92-39) i f e x t e r n a l power i s not
a v a i l a b l e , o r t o provide emergency power i f both g e n e r a t o r s f a i l .
Ths BATTERY SWITCH, described i n paragraph 92-9.2, i s used t o energize
b a t t e r y r e l a y 6P, causing e x t e r n a l power r e l a y 7P t o de-energize ( a l l
S e r i e s ) . The s t a r t e r bus PP1 and t h e main bus PP21 a r e t h e n supplied with
power from t h e b a t t e r y 1 P .
When changing t o emergency operation, i . e . , push button i n d i c a t o r EMERG DC
BUS i n ON (see f i g u r e s 92-19 t h r u 92-21), t h e emergency bus r e l a y 40P o r 14P
i s energized and connects t h e p o s i t i v e t e r m i n a l of t h e b a t t e r y 1 P t o
emergency bus PP20 o r PP22, a s a p p l i c a b l e .
I n t h i s case, t h e s t a r t e r bus P P 1 and t h e main bus PP21 a r e de-energized.

92 - 12 gperation - external power ( s e e f i g u r e s 92-14 t o 92-15)


For s t a r t i n g t h e engines and during ground maintenance, a 28V e x t e r n a l power
u n i t i s normally connected t o t h e a i r c r a f t system.
The nwximum current input of t h e e x t e r n a l power source i s 400A. I n p o s i t i o n
EPiJ ON (pushbutton switch depressed) and BATTERY MASTER switch OFF, b a t t e r y
1 P i s disconnected and t h e e x t e r n a l power r e c e p t a c l e 2P i s connected v i a
contact of r e l a y 7 P t o t h e busses P P 1 and PP21. I n a d d i t i o n , power supply
r e l a y 8P i s actuated and connects a u x i l i a r y bus PP22 t o t h e o t h e r busses.
When e x t e r n a l power i s connected and switched on, t h e i n d i c a t o r l i g h t 27P
(S/N 7 - 160 s e r i e s A,C,D) o r t h e i n d i c a t o r l i g h t EPU ON i l l u m i n a t e s (S/N 161
and up, s e r i e s A,C, S) .
Since both generator r e l a y s 109P, 209P and l l O P , 210P have dropped out, r e d
warning l i g h t s GEN 1 and GEN 2 l o c a t e d i n instrument panel 2VE w i l l
illirminate.
B 0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 48
MAINTENANCE MANUAL BO 105

92 -- 13 Power distribution

1. General
Distribution of the electrical power supplied by any of the three power sources (generators, battery and ex-
ternal power unit) is accomplished via three or four busses to the individual loads. The latter are protected
by fuses or circuit breakers. For circuit breaker location, refer to para 92--14.

2. Starter bus
The starter bus PP1 is supplied with electrical power during operation of any of the three power sources,
and is primarily used for supplying the starter--generators during engine starting. In addition, high--power--
consuming optional equipments may be connected to it. For loads connected to the starter bus, refer to
figure 92--25.

3. Main bus
The main bus PP21 is supplied with electrical power during the following operating modes:

a. EPU operation

b. Battery operation

c. Single generator operation

d. Dual generator operation


All equipment and systems essential to normal helicopter operation, are connected to the main bus (refer
to figure 92--25). In case one generator should fail, the electrical power produced by the second generator
is sufficient to supply all of the connected loads. In case both generators fail, the main bus is supplied with
electrical power from the battery.

EFFECTIVITY Series D or when the optional emergency bus is installed.


Should both generators fail, the main bus is de--energized by pressing the EMERG.
DC BUS pushbutton indicator. The emergency bus is then supplied with battery power.
For connected loads, refer to figure 92--25.

4. Auxiliary bus
The auxiliary bus PP22 is supplied with electrical power during the following operating modes:

CHAPTER 92
Page 49
MAINTENANCE MANUAL BO 105

a. EPU operation

EFFECTIVITY Series A, C (S/N 7 -- 80)

b. Single generator and dual generator operation

EFFECTIVITY Series D and series A, C, S


S/N 81 and subsequent

c. Dual generator operation only


For connected loads, refer to figure 92--25.

5. Emergency bus

EFFECTIVITY Series D or when optional emergency bus installed.


The emergency bus PP20 is supplied with electrical power during operation of any of the three power supply
sources.
In case both generators should fail, the emergency bus provides battery power to all vital equipment.
The battery is activated as an emergency power source via EMERG DC BUS pushbutton indicator 41P (S/N
7 -- 160 and series D) or 15P (S/N 161 and subsequent, and series S) and emergency bus relay 40P (S/N
7 -- 160 and series D) or 14P (S/N 161 and subsequent, and series S) respectively, which illuminates as
soon as the emergency bus is energized (refer to figures 92--19 thru 92--21).

NOTE With EMERG DC BUS pushbutton indicator depressed, neither the generators nor an
external power source be connected to the system.

6. Fuses and circuit breakers


The circuit breakers for the loads are located on instrument panel 12VE (refer to figures 92--11 thru 92--13),
in the overhead panel 12VE (see fig. 92--100), and in the center panel (see fig. 92--101).
The fuses and circuit breakers are installed on the left and right sides in the bottom of the instrument panel
2VE (see fig. 92--40).

7. DC socket
The socket 2VEG is located on the lower left side of the instrument panel 2VE. When the access hole cover
is removed from the instrument panel fairing, external 28V DC loads can be connected to the socket.
The DC socket 1s supplied with electrical power from the emergency bus via 20A circuit breaker 1U ”DC
SOCKET”.

CHAPTER 92 Revision 26
Page 50
.n
0
0
0
P
4

?rn!
5
(70
m
C
m
C
5
m
Z
<n
-- -L
55
mta
SYSTEMS WlTH ClRCUlT BREAKER OR FUSE
r-- - -----------------------------,,-,-----.------
1
1 I
I - STARTER/IGNITlON SYST.-1J I
- EMEFIG. FuEL vALvE ENG 1-1wA 83
I n - EMERG. FuEL vALvE. ENG 1-twA I w E
I - EMERG. FUEL VALVE ENG 2-2WA n - EMEAO. FUEL VALVE. ENG 2 - ~ W A I I
I I
I
COCKPIT AND CAFIGO
COMPARTMENT LIGHTING-2LC
I
8
F
I - ANTl ICIW. ENG 1-lHL I 0
Cn
I - ANTI ICING. ENG 2-2HL I
I - FIRE D E T E c T ~ENG
~ 1- 1wG n - FlRE DETEcTm. E r n l-lw
- FlRE DETECTION. ENG 2-2WG n- FlRE DETECTION. ENG 2-2WG I
I - HYD. CONT. MONITOR. SYST.-IDB n- HYD. C M . MONITOR. SYST.-Y>B I
I - INSTRUMENT LIGHTING- K C n - INSTRUMENT I
1 - FUEL LOW WARNING-2E n - LOW
LIGHTING-1LC
FUEL WAANING-2E
I
I
- FUEL QUANTITY IND.- 3E FUEL OUANTITY IN.- 3E

I
1FUEL PRESSURE IM.-7E I
- FUEL ND. WARNING LIGHTS-OE I
I I
I - FUEL M A N TANK. PUMP 1- 1QM n - FUEL MAlN TANK.
PUMP 1-IQM I

'
1 W
5!z
FUEL M A N TANK
PUMP 2-40M
I
I

'
I FUEL SUPPLY TANK
PUMP 1-8QM I
I g FUEL SUPPLY
PUMP 2- 10QM
TANK.A FUEL SUPPLY TANK
PUMP 2-10QM
I
I I
- DIFF. FlJEL PRESS W A M N G - O f - DIFF. FUEL PRESSURE
WARNING-9E I
I = - SHAFT MOMENT W.- IWM
- N2 RPM CONTROL-1KA
I
I
I
II -42 CHlP DETECTOR WAANlNG
SYSTEM- 1OE I
- POSITION LIGHTS-2LA 1
I I
I - ANTl COLLISW LIGHT-1U I
I I
I - RPM WAWNG-4E I
1 OIL TEMPERATURE I
MDICATION-GE
1 I
OIL PRESSURE
1 INDICATION-SE I
I - OIL PRESSURE AN0 I
I TEMPERATURE WARNING-20EW I
I
I - PlTOT TUBE HEATING-1HG
I - TRIMMING- 1CC I
I
I - STARTER GENERATOR 1- 128P - STARTER/
GEN. 1-128P
I
I I
I - STARTER GENERATOR 2-228P STARTER/
- GEN. 2-228P
I - SOCKET DC- 1U - SOCKET DC-1U I
I I
L ----- ------- - - - - --------------------------.------J
,------------------ 7
I
I
- EXTERNAL LWDSPEAKER- 1TD - EXTEFlNAL LOUDSPEAKER-1TD I
- FlRE EXTING. SYST.-3WB -4WB n - FlRE EXTING. SYST.-3WB. 4WB I
1 - STAB. AUGMENT. SYST. SAS- 1cA n - STAB. AuGM. sYsT. (sAs)-1cA I
I - HEATlNG SYSTEM-2HA - H E A T f f i - lHA - HEATHQ-25HA I
I - FUEL JETTlSON SYSTEM-I<)A n-- FUEL JETTICON SYSTEM.-IQA I
- LONG RANGE N E L T.-5QA.-BOA
b - LA- I
'
I 0

1
3
f
L A N D W LlßHT-3LA
- LOAD HOOK- 1MD
LIGHT-3LA
- LOAD HOOK-WD
- FUEL MIKRDFILTER-@E
I
I
- FOLLOW UP TRIM-1CC
- EMERG. FLOATATlONSYST.-1GL - EMERG. FLOATATlON SYST.-IGL I
R A D I O M V . SYSTEM-IR - RADIOMV. SYST.-2R I
- ENG. AIR CLEANER- IKC I
- CHlP DETECT. M A N TRANSM.-BE I
SEARCHLKiHT-310U - SEARCtUlßHT- 400U.-3LA - S313LA
U R C H LIGHT-
1
WWCH CONTROL-2MF - W W H CUTTER-IMF - W M H MOTOFI-3~~1
WINDSHIELD WIPER- 1ME - WINDSCHIELD WIPER-IME I
I - BLEED AIR H E A T M - W I
I I
I I
1 I
I I
I I
I I
MAINTENANCE MANUAL BO 105

92 -- 14 Protection of DC power system circuits

1. Protection of internal circuits


The following fuses are installed to protect the internal wiring circuits of the DC power supply system:

a. Fuses

NOTE With post SB BO105--90--102 fuses can be replaced by circuit breakers.


4A fuses be replaced by 5A circuit breakers.

FUSES PROTECTION INSTALLATION EFFECTIVITY


Nom. Cap.
5P 300A Starter bus overload (battery Engine deck Series S
switching circuit)
11P 4A Energizing circuit of relay 6P 2VE All helicopters S/N 7 -- 160
and 26P
11P 4A Energizing circuit of relay 6P 2VE All helicopters S/N 161 and
subsequent
13P 50A Emergency bus overload 2VE Series D or with the optional
emerg. bus installed
25P 130A Main bus overload 2VE Series S
25P 300A Starter bus overload 2VE Series A, C, D
S/N 7 and subsequent
26P 80A Emergency bus overload 2VE Series S
29P 4A Energizing circuit of relay 7P, 1VE Series A, C, S
8P and 10P and circuits of S/N 7 and subsequent
warning lights GEN 1 and
GEN 2
29P 4A Energizing circuit of relay 7P, 1VE Series D
8P and 10P and circuit of
warning light GEN 1
Table 92-2 Protection of DC power system(1 of 2)

Revision 26 CHAPTER 92
Page 53
MAINTENANCE MANUAL BO 105

FUSES PROTECTION INSTALLATION EFFECTIVITY


30P 4A Control circuit of external 2VE All helicopters S/N 7 and
power supply and EPU ON subsequent
indicator light circuit
31P 4A Electrical circuit (shunt 20P) 2VE All helicopters S/N 7 and
32P 4A bus, battery subsequent
33P 4A Electrical circuit (shunt 21) 2VE All helicopters S/N 7 and
34P 4A generator 1 subsequent
35P 4A Electrical circuit (shunt 22) 2VE All helicopters S/N 7 and
36P 4A generator 2 subsequent
37P 4A Energizing circuit of genera- 1VE Series A, C, S
tor relay l09P S/N 7 and subsequent
38P 4A Energizing circuit of genera- 1VE Series A, C, S
tor relay 209P S/N 7 and subsequent
39P 4A Electrical circuit of generator 1VE Series D
failure warning light GEN 2

Table 92-2 Protection of DC power system(2 of 2)

b. Circuit breakers

1) Resetting tripped circuit breakers


General. There is a latent danger in resetting a circuit breaker (CB) tripped by an unknown cause because
the tripped condition is a signal that something may be wrong in the related circuit. Until it is determined
what has caused the CB to trip, crew members have no way of knowing the consequences of resetting a
tripped CB.
On the ground. A CB tripped by an unknown cause may only be reset on the ground after maintenance
has determined the cause of the tripping and has determined that the CB may be safely reset. A CB may
be cycled (tripped, pulled or reset) when it is required to be done within approved maintenance inspection
criteria or as part of an approved trouble shooting procedure. Unless doing so is specifically prohibited.
Resetting a CB tripped by an unknown cause is a maintenance action to be done on ground.
Logbook entry: A detailed logbook entry is a mandatory safety practice.

Two circuit breakers 128P and 228P are located in main relay box 1VE and are used to protect the circuit which
control the connection of the respective starter--generators to the electrical system.

CHAPTER 92 Revision 26
Page 54
MAINTENANCE MANUAL BO 105

92 -- 15 Troubleshooting -- DC power system

1. General
In order to perform troubleshooting, the circuit breakers must be powered and depressed, and the fuses
/ circuit breakers intact.
A lamp test shall be carried out to ensure that the annunciators are not defective.
Prior to replacement of any system component, check electrical wiring for continuity, insulation faults and
proper connections.
Also check for proper connection of electrical connectors to the units.
The respective wiring diagrams are contained in the Wiring Diagram Manual.

CAUTION BEWARE OF SHORT CIRCUITING WHEN MEASURING LIVE COMPONENTS.

2. Troubleshooting -- generator system

NO. TROUBLE SYMPTOM PROBABLE CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION


1. Starter--generator switch GEN Defective circuit breaker 128P Using a multimeter, check for
1 (GEN 2) is in position GEN or (228P). presence of 27,5V* at both con-
GEN ON, but generator is iso- nection points of the circuit
lated from electrical system al- breaker against ground.
though the engines are running.
Replace circuit breaker, as nec-
Battery master switch 16P is
essary.
ON.
* see adjustable voltage regula-
tor
Defective startergenerator con- Check control switch for conti-
trol switch. nuity. Replace switch, as nec-
essary.
Generator supplies no voltage. Check generator and replace
as necessary.
Defective voltage regulator. Interchange voltage regulators.
Replace, as required.
Table 92-3 Troubleshooting -- DC power system(1 of 5)

Revision 26 CHAPTER 92
Page 55
MAINTENANCE MANUAL BO 105

NO. TROUBLE SYMPTOM PROBABLE CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION


Faulty reverse--current relay Using a multimeter, check re-
105P (205P) verse--current relay for pres-
ence of voltage at terminal SW.
(Starter--generator switch in
position GEN). If voltage is
present, replace reverse--cur-
rent relay. If voltage is not pres-
ent, generator control relay
106P (206P), or power supply
relay 8P is defective. Replace
defective components.
2. Ammeter (19P) pointer does Defective ammeter. Set ammeter selector switch to
not deflect to the left, although another position. Check for cor-
both generators are connected rect indication. Replace amme-
to the line, ammeter selector ter, if necessary.
switch set is in position BATT
and loads are being carried.
Defective ammeter selector Set ammeter selector switch to
switch. another position. Check for cor-
rect indication. Replace amme-
ter selector switch, if necessary.
Defective or incorrectly con- Set ammeter selector switch
nected shunt. into another position. Check for
correct indication. Replace
shunt or connect it correctly.
3. EPU ON indicator light does not Defective lamp. Check lamp operation by de-
illuminate with external power pressing light cover. Replace
source connected and ener- lamp, if required.
gized and battery master switch
16P set in position EPU ON --
BATT OFF
Defective wiring. Check for continuity using the
applicable wiring diagram.
Table 92-3 Troubleshooting -- DC power system(2 of 5)

CHAPTER 92
Page 56
MAINTENANCE MANUAL BO 105

NO. TROUBLE SYMPTOM PROBABLE CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION


4. EPU cannot be connected to Inadequate voltage supply from Check external power source.
the line, although battery mas- external power source.
ter switch 16P is in EPU ON --
BATT OFF or OFF.
Defective wiring. Check wiring for continuity, us-
ing the applicable wiring dia-
gram.
Defective fuse / circuit breaker Check fuse / circuit breaker and
30P. replace as necessary.
Defective external power relay. Check relay for continuity and
replace, as necessary.
5. Battery is not connected to the Battery not connected, or im- Connect battery
line, although battery master properly connected.
switch 16P is set in position
EPU OFF -- BATT ON or ON.
Battery voltage nil or too low. Check battery voltage. Charge
or replace battery.
Defective wiring. Check wiring for continuity, us-
ing the applicable wiring dia-
gram.
Defective fuses / circuit break- Check fuses / circuit breakers
ers (11P, 25P). for continuity and replace, as
required.
Defective battery relay 6P. Check relay for continuity and
replace, as required.
Defective battery master switch Check relay for continuity and
16P. replace, as required.
6. Auxiliary bus is not energized One generator is not connected Using the ammeter, check
although both generators are to the line. whether both generators are
connected to the line. connected to the line. Check
generator failure warning light.
EPU still connected to the line. Check EPU ON indicator light.
Disconnect EPU.
Table 92-3 Troubleshooting -- DC power system(3 of 5)

Revision 26 CHAPTER 92
Page 57
MAINTENANCE MANUAL BO 105

NO. TROUBLE SYMPTOM PROBABLE CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION


Defective auxiliary bus relay Check for continuity, using the
10P. applicable wiring diagram. Re-
place, as required.
7. Auxiliary bus is not energized; Defective power supply relay Check for continuity and re-
external power source is ener- 8P. place, as necessary.
gized.
Defective auxiliary bus relay Check for continuity and re-
10P. place, as necessary.
Defective wiring. Check for continuity, using the
applicable wiring diagram.
8. Emergency bus is not ener- Defective fuse / circuit breaker Check fuse / circuit breaker and
gized 11P. replace, as necessary.
Defective EMERG DC BUS Check for continuity using wir-
pushbutton indicator. ing diagram and replace indica-
tor as required.
Defective emergency bus relay. Check for continuity using wir-
ing diagram and replace, as
necessary.
9. Voltage fluctuations at a Defective voltage regulator. Interchange voltage regulators
constant load. and replace defective regulator.
10. Warning light GEN 1 (GE 2) Defective generator failure Check lamps by depressing
does not illuminate when gener- warning light 23P. warning light test switch 6EB.
ator is switched off or fails. Replace faulty lamps or warn-
ing light, as necessary.
Defective generator relay 109P Check wiring for continuity. Re-
(209P). place relay as necessary.

Table 92-3 Troubleshooting -- DC power system(4 of 5)

CHAPTER 92 Revision 26
Page 58
MBB HELICOPTERS'
MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB -
B0 105

TROUBLESHOOTING (continued)

NO. TROUBLE SYMPTOM PROBABLE CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION

11 Warning l i g h t GEN 1 Defective reverse- Using a multimeter, check


(GEN 2) i l l d n a t e s current relay 105P reverse-current relay f o r
when the generator (205P). presence of voltage a t
i s connected t o the terminal APP (on S/N
line . -
9 80), o r terminal IND
on S/N 81 and subsq.) .
I f voltage i s not present,
replace reverse-current
relay. I f voltage i s pre-
sent, replace generator
relay .
1 2 No voltage indication Defective voltmeter Replace voltmeter.
when battery, EPU or 18P.
generator i s
connected t o l i n e . Faulty wiring Check continuity of wiring,
using applicable wiring
diagram.

Pointer of ammeter Defective ammeter. Set ammeter selector switch


19P does not deflect t o another position.
t o the right, although Check f o r correct indication.
the generator selected
by the ammeter selec- Defective ammeter Set ammeter selector switch
t o r switch i s con- selector switch. t o another position.
nected t o t h e elec- Check f o r correct indication.
t r i c a l system and Replace ammeter selector
loads are being s w i t ch.
carried.
Defective or Set ammeter selector switch
incorrectly t o another position.
connected shunts Check f o r correct indication.
(21P = Generator 1) Replace shunt or connect
(22P = Generator 2 ) correctly.

Table 92-3 Troubleshooting - DC power system (5 of 5)

B 0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 59
MBB HELICOPTERS
MAINTENANCE MANUU MBB - B0 105
92 - 16 MAINTENANCE - DC POWER SYSTEM
92 - 17 Check and adjustment of generator voltage
I

1. General

Generator voltage must be checked and adjusted a f t e r replacement of a


generator, voltage regulator, reverse-current relay and associated
wiring. Check and adjustment s h a l l be performed on t h e ground w i t h
engines running.
2. Test equipment

1 Voltmeter 0 - 30V, 0.3% accuracy ( e r r o r 5 0.1V)


3. Preparatory steps

a. Connect voltmeter t o s t a r t e r bus P P 1 and connect ground jumper t o


main relay box.

b. Run engines a t ground i d l e speed.


C. Set battery switch t o ON.
d. Set ammeter s e l e c t o r switch t o Center position.
e. Set generator 1 and 2 switches t o ON.
- GEN 1 and GEN 2 warning l i g h t s must not come On.

f. I f present, switch off EMERG DC BUS pushbutton indicator.


4. Measurement and adjustment of generator No. 1 and No. 2 voltages.

CAUTION BEWARE OE' SHORT CIRCUITING WHEN MEASURING LIVE PARTS.

NOTE Adjustments s h a l l be made a f t e r t h e generators and voltage


regulators have had time t o warm up. Therefore, t h e
generators s h a l l be operated under load f o r a t l e a s t 5
minutes. .
a. Pul1 c i r c u i t breaker 228P ( 1 V E ) .
- warning l i g h t GEN 2 s h a l l come On.

b. Switch on e l e c t r i c a l equipment connected t o main bus PP21, e.g. f u e l


pumps, landing l i g h t , i n t e r i o r l i g h t s . The applied load s h a l l be
between 15 and 30 amperes.

B0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 60
MBB HELICOPTERS
MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB - B0 105
Read voltmeter indicat ion.
- Nominal values:
19-cell battery: 27.5V f 0.1V
20-cell battery: 28.OV f 0.1V

I f the reading on t h e voltmeter d i f f e r s from the nominal value, turn


the voltage regulating screw on the voltage regulator 104P (see f i g .
92-26) t o s e t the correct value.

Depress c i r c u i t breaker 228P and pul1 c i r c u i t breaker 128P (1VE)


-Warning l i g h t GEN 2 must go out, warning l i g h t GEN 1 must come On.
Repeat step C. I f necessary, adjust voltage regulator 204P t o obtain
the nominal value.

NOTE o The maximum difference between both generator voltages must


not exceed 0.2V.
Example: Gen. No. 1 = 27.9V, Gen. No. 2= 28.1V
If max. difference i s exceeded, repeat adjustment.
o I f the BAT 60 warning occurs frequently as a r e s u l t of the
max. ambient temperature being exceeded , the required
nominal values can be decreased by 0.5V by r e s e t t i n g the
voltage regulator .
o A t extremely low ambient temperatures, t h e voltage
regulator can be reset t o increase t h e required nominal
value by 0.5V.

Depress c i r c u i t breaker 128P again.


-warning l i g h t GEN 1 must go out.
Shut down engines.
Swivel the protective caps i n place over both voltage regulator
adjusting screws and tighten.
Disconnect voltmeter, i n s t a l l Cover on main relay box lVE, and
i n s t a l l cargo compartment panels.

B0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 6 1
MBB HELICOPTERS
-'

MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB B0 105

Potentiometer for
voltage regulation

Figure 92-26 Voltage regulator

92-18 G e n e r a t o r S y s t e m
The generator system c o n s i s t s of:
- two starter-generators 103P and 203P
- one voltage regulator each 1 0 4 ~or 204P (108P o r 208P on s e r i e s D)
- one generator relay each 109P and 209P( s e (107Pl207P o r llOP/210P on s e r i e s D)
- one shunt f i e l d relay 106P and 206P r i e s A, C only)
- one power supply relay 8P
- a u x i l i a r y S t a r t relay lOlJ and 2015 (106P and 206P on s e r i e s D)
- warning l i g h t s f o r generator overheating (see paragraph 92-34).
Location See paragraph 92-8

B 0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 62
MBB HELICOPTERS
MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB B 0 105 -
1. General

With t h e engines running, t h e generator system supplies t h e DC power


system with regulated 28V power and charges t h e airborne b a t t e r y (see
paragraph 92-10) .

2. Generator relay

EFFECTIVITY Series A, C t o SfN 80

The generator relays 109P (LH generator) and 209P (RH generator) a r e
located i n the main relay box 1VE. These relays control t h e r e l a t e d
warninglights (GEN 1 and GEN 2) and t h e a u x i l i a r y bus relay 10P (see
figures 92-22 t h r u 92-24). Both relays a r e energized when t h e
corresponding reverse-current relays have connected t h e generators t o t h e
busses .

a. Generator relay 109P


When de-energized (generator 1 f a i l e d o r disconnected from t h e l i n e ) ,
t h e single-pole generator relay connects voltage t o t h e GEN 1 f a i l u r e
warning l i g h t . When energized, it routes voltage t o the control
c i r c u i t of t h e a u x i l i a r y bus relay.
b. Generator relay 209P
When de-energized (generator 2 f a i l e d or disconnected from the l i n e ) ,
t h e dual-pole generator relay connects voltage v i a a contact t o t h e
GEN 2 f a i l u r e warning l i g h t . The second contact disconnects t h e
control l i n e of t h e a u x i l i a r y bus relay.

EFFECTIVITY Series A, C S/N 81 and subsequent


The r e l a y contacts (109P and 209P) f o r t h e control
of t h e a u x i l i a r y bus relay 10P a r e connected i n
s e r i e s , i . e . on f a i l u r e of a generator, the relay 1 0 P
i s de-energized and thus disconnects the a u x i l i a r y
bus PP22 from t h e helicopter e l e c t r i c a l system.

C. Generator relay (107P, 207P, l l O P , 210P)

EFFECTIVITY Series D
Each starter-generator i s controlled by two generator
relays which a r e located i n t h e main relay box 1VE.
The generator relays 107P and 207P connect t h e
generators t o t h e main bus and disconnect them i n
case a reverse current occurs. Control of the r e l a y s
i s v i a t h e e x c i t a t i o n l i n e o f . t h e voltage regulators
108P and 208P.

B0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 63
MBB HELICOPTERS
MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB -
B0 105

The generator relays l l O P and 210P a r e a l s o i n t h e


excitation l i n e of the voltage regulators and energize
respectively the GEN 1 and GEN 2 f a i l u r e warning l i g h t s
and the auxiliary bus relay 10P.
3. Generator control relay

EFFECTIVITY Series A, C, S

The generator control relays 106P (LH generator) and 206P (RH generator)
are located i n the main relay box 1VE. The dual pole relays control the
energizing of the reverse-current relays, a s well as t h e equalizing
c i r c u i t of t h e voltage regulator.
The generator control relays a r e energized by t h e starter-generator
control switch (position GEN ON or G E N ) .

When energized, the generator control relays feed voltage t o the respec-
tive S
W terminals of the reverse-current relays v i a the corresponding
closed contacts of the power supply relay 8P (contacts a r e closed i f
external power source i s not connected).
The second contacts ( i n s e r i e s ) close t h e equalizing c i r c u i t of the
voltage regulator.
4. Power supply relay

The power supply relay 8P i s located i n t h e main relay box 1VE. This
triple-pole relay controls the connection of t h e generators t o the l i n e
and the actuation of the auxiliary bus relay.

The power supply relay i s energized when an external power source (EPU)
i s connected t o the helicopter e l e c t r i c a l system (see paragraph 92-12).
When energized, the power supply relay i n t e r r u p t s the control l i n e of the
reverse-current relay (two contacts), i . e . generators cannot be connected
t o the l i n e during EPU operation.

The t h i r d contact closes t h e energizing c i r c u i t of the auxiliary bus


relay .
5. Shunt f i e l d relay 106P and 206P

EFFECTIVITY Series D

Each generator comprises a shunt f i e l d relay located i n t h e main relay


box ~ V E , which ensures constant generator f i e l d excitation.

With the generator control switch i n position ON or START, the S t a r t e r


relay (see paragraph 92-39) and the shunt f i e l d relay a r e energized.

B0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 64
MBB HELICOPTERS
MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB B0 105 -
The shunt f i e l d relay i n t e r r u p t s t h e power supply t o t h e f i e l d excitation
winding of t h e generator w i t h one contact, and simultaneously short-
c i r c u i t s t h e f i e l d excitation winding w i t h t h e other contact.

A starter-generator i s flanged t o t h e lower, a f t r i g h t side of each


engine (I - 11) gearbox.
The starter-generator incorporates a shunt winding which i s located i n
t h e shunt c i r c u i t of the voltage regulator, thus controlling t h e
e x c i t a t i o n (RPM output voltage) of t h e generator. I n t h e s t a r t e r mode
(engine s t a r t i n g ) a s e r i e s winding i s connected i n s e r i e s w i t h t h e
armature .
To compensate f o r an armature reaction (brush arcing during l o a d ) , an
i n t e r p o l e winding and a compensation winding i s connected i n s e r i e s w i t h
t h e armature.
A t 100%N2 engine RPM t h e generator speed i s 12070 rprn. The normal speed
range i s 7200 t o 12100 rpm but an overspeed of up t o 14000 rpm i s per-
missible f o r a short time. The nominal output of t h e starter-generators
i s 28V, 150A.
A fan attached t o t h e armature s h a f t i s used f o r self-cooling t h e u n i t .
Additional cooling of t h e starter-generators i s provided by ram a i r
( r e f e r t o chapter 65).

A+
0 REGULATOR
E
n
W

REGULATOR- COMPENSATION
INTERPOLE- WlNDlNG
-
--

SERIES WlNDlNG C+

1 Drive Shaft 5 Commutator


2 Terminal 6 Armature
3 Fan 7 Windings
4 Brush holder

Figure 92-27 Cross-Sectional View and Schematic Diagram


of t h e Starter-Generator
B0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 65/66
MAINTENANCE MANUAL BO 105

92 -- 20 Removal and installation -- starter--generators

1. Removal

a. Disconnect the battery or, if connected, the external power source from the helicopter electrical system,
and secure against inadvertent reconnection.

b. Remove engine cowlings.

c. Disconnect wiring from terminal block (5).

d. Loosen V--clamp (2) of the starter--generator and carefully lift starter--generator (4) or (9) from mounting
pad (1).

EFFECTIVITY SB 60--31 or S/N 321 and subsequent


S Loosen hose clamp (7) on GRP fan cover (6) of starter--generator and pull off
cooling air hose (8).
S Loosen V--clamp (2) of starter--generator and lift starter--generator (4) or (9) from
mounting pad (1).
S Unscrew GRP fan cover from starter--generator and retain for later re--installation
(clean the fan cover).

2. Installation

CAUTION S INSTALL STARTER--GENERATOR WITH ”WET SPLINE” DRIVE SHAFT (P/N


32032--027, ALSO TO BE RECOGNIZED BY THE PACKING GROOVE BEHIND
DRIVE SPLINES) ONLY TO ENGINE GEARBOX MODIFIED FOR THIS PURPOSE
(REFER TO SERVICE INFORMATION NO. 50).
S APPLY GREASE (ITEM 101) TO DRIVE SPLINES OF STARTER--GENERATOR
WITH ”DRY SPLINE” DRIVE SHAFT (P/N 23032--022, NO PACKING GROOVE
BEHIND THE DRIVE SPLINES).
S ON STARTER--GENERATORS WITH ”WET SPLINE” DRIVE SHAFTS, CHECK
O--RING (3, FIGURE 92--28) INSTALLED BEHIND THE DRIVE SPLINES FOR
DAMAGE AND REPLACE O--RINGS, IF NECESSARY.

CHAPTER 92
Page 67
MAINTENANCE MANUAL BO 105

A 25-26.5 Nm
A

2.26--2.83 Nm

Terminal block
torques

CAUTION
INSTALL STARTER--GENERATOR
WITH “WET SPLINE” DRIVE
SHAFT ONLY ON ENGINE
GEARBOXES MODIFIED BY
ALLISON CEB 179 OR CEB 1082.
(Refer to 2. Installation)

5
4

3
2
1

9
1 Mounting pad
2 V--clamp CAUTION
3 O--ring
INSTALL STARTER--GENERATOR
4 Starter--generator (”wet spline” drive shaft)
WITH “DRY SPLINE” DRIVE
5 Terminal block
SHAFT ONLY ON ENGINE
6 FRP--housing
GEARBOXES NOT MODIFIED BY
7 Hose clamp
ALLISON CEB 179 OR CEB 1082.
8 Cooling air hose
(Refer to 2. Installation)
9 Starter--generator (”dry spline” drive shaft)

Figure 92--28 Removal and Installation of the Starter--generator

CHAPTER 92 Revision 26
Page 68
MAINTENANCE MANUAL BO 105

a. Inspect starter--generator for visible damage.

EFFECTIVITY SB 60--31 or S/N 321 and subsequent.


Install GRP fan cover (6) to starter--generator.

b. Push starter--generator (4) or (9), together with V--clamp (2), in mounting pad until drive splines are fully
engaged with splines in I.D. of engine gearbox bushing.

CAUTION PRESS STARTER--GENERATOR FIRMLY AGAINST MOUNTING PAD (1) TO


PREVENT SCREW HEADS FROM SLIDING OUT OF THE PAD RECESSES
(DAMAGE TO SPLINES OF DRIVE SHAFT).

c. Align screw heads on starter--generator with recesses on pad so that the terminal block (5) comes to seat
at the lower side, as shown in figure 92--28.

d. Tighten ”T” bolt nut and torque to 4--6 Nm.

e. Re--connect wiring to terminal block (refer to wiring diagram and torque i.a.w. figure 92--28).

f. If a new or overhauled starter--generator is installed, or the carbon brushes have been replaced, function-
ally test the generator system and adjust the generator voltage as necessary (refer to para 92--24).

92 -- 20A Inspection and maintenance -- starter--generators

NOTE For shop maintenance or overhaul of the starter--generators refer to LEAR SIEGLER
Manuals.
1. Check for warped or cracked terminal block or damaged terminals.
2. Check fan cover for dents and broken spot welds.
3. Clean exterior surfaces of unit with a clean cloth moistened with cleaning solvent (CM 202). Wipe unit with
a dry, clean cloth. Dry and clean splines of drive shaft.
4. Remove fan cover and check for oil, carbon and copper dust, dirt and other foreign objects.

CAUTION S DO NOT USE COMPRESSED AIR FOR INTERNAL CLEANING OF


STARTER--GENERATORS.
S DO NOT WIPE COMMUTATOR, BRUSHES AND BRUSH HOLDERS.
5. Remove deposits with a cloth moistened with cleaning solvent (CM 202), and remove foreign objects with
a vacuum cleaner only.

Revision 26 CHAPTER 92
Page 69
MAINTENANCE MANUAL BO 105

6. Visually inspect fan for bent blades, friction marks, cracks or loose connections.

NOTE Check bearings for condition only with brushes removed from holders.
7. Rotate armature slowly with your fingers to feel bearing condition.
8. Check brushes for cracks, chips, frayed leads and loose rivets.

-- The remaining service life of the brushes must be more than one quarter of the total service life, otherwise
the brushes must be replaced.
9. Reinstall brushes in their initial positions making sure that they are properly seated on commutator surface
(100% in direction of rotation and at least 75% in axial direction is mandatory).
10. Inspect commutator for surface condition. The commutator must have a bright appearance and a thin film
on the surface.
11. Reinstall fan cover.

92 -- 21 Voltage regulators
The two voltage regulators 104P and 204P or 108P and 208P are installed in the main relay box 1VE (see figure
92LEERER MERKER to 92--2). The voltage regulators perform the following functions:

1. Voltage regulation
Generator voltage is regulated to the adjusted nominal value of 27.5V or 28.0V respectively using the ex-
citer current in the regulator. Voltage fluctuations because of load and speed changes must not be greater
than ± 0.1V.

2. Parallel operation control


During parallel operation, the generators are regulated by the voltage regulators so that they are equally
loaded. The voltage regulators are controlled mutually via a equalizing line.

3. Generator relay control/reverse--current protection


The generator relays are energized or de--energized by the voltage regulators depending on the condition
of the DC power system. The generator relay is automatically energized when the voltage of the respective
generator almost equals that of the helicopter electrical system (minus 0.3V of the adjusted voltage). This
is to prevent reverse current during lock--on. The respective generator is de--energized if reverse current
flows.

CHAPTER 92 Revision 14
Page 70
EUROCOPTER MAINTENANCE MANUAL B 0 105

4. Overvoltage p r o t e c t i o n
*
EFFECTIVITY: A l l h e l i c o p t e r models except model D, DBS-5, CB-5 and CBS-5. *
The voltage r e g u l a t o r opens t h e generator r e l a y and generator f i e l d i f an *
overvoltage condition occurs. The generator is not automatically re-
connected t o t h e h e l i c o p t e r e l e c t r i c a l system but must be r e a c t i v a t e d by
momentarily s e t t i n g t h e toggle switch GEN CONTROL t o OFF, then t o GEN.
*
EFFECTIVITY: Helicopter models D and DBS-5. *
In D series each generator is switched on by s e t t i n g t h e GEN CONTROL *
toggle switch t o RESET and then t o ON. *
*
EFFECTIVITY: Helicopter models CB-5 and CBS-5. Helicopter models C and S *
a f t e r accomplishment of ASB-B0105-80-118 andlor SB-B0105-80-119. *
Two switches a r e i n s t a l l e d i n t h e overhead panel by means of which *
generators, shut off a s a r e s u l t of overvoltage, can be switched on again *
individually. *
*
5. Short-circuit p r o t e c t i o n *
The voltage r e g u l a t o r opens t h e generator r e l a y and generator f i e l d i f
t h e generator feeder o r s t a r t e r bus PP1 s h o r t s t o ground.
92 - 22 Removal and i n s t a l l a t i o n - voltage regulators
1. Removal

a. Disconnect b a t t e r y or, i f connected, t h e e x t e r n a l power source from


t h e h e l i c o p t e r e l e c t r i c a l system and secure a g a i n s t inadvertent
reconnection.
b. Remove cover on lower r i g h t s i d e of t h e cargo compartment panelling.
. C. Open four quick-release f a s t e n e r s of main r e l a y box 1VE cover. Remove
cover.
d. Disconnect e l e c t r i c a l connector from voltage regulator.
e. Remove four mounting screws from voltage r e g u l a t o r .
f. L i f t voltage r e g u l a t o r from main r e l a y box IVE.
2. Installation

a. Inspect voltage r e g u l a t o r f o r v i s i b l e damage.


b. Position voltage r e g u l a t o r i n i t s i n s t a l l a t i o n l o c a t i o n and secure i n
place with t h e f o u r mounting screws.
C. Re-connect e l e c t r i c a l connector t o voltage r e g u l a t o r .
d. Perform f u n c t i o n a l test of t h e DC generator system ( r e f e r to.92-24
Functional Test).
e. Inspect main r e l a y box 1VE f o r f o r e i g n o b j e c t s .
B0 105
CHAPTER 92
Revision 16 Page 71
EUROCOPTER MAINTENANCE MANUAL B 0 105

f. P o s i t i o n cover on main r e l a y box 1VE and s e c u r e w i t h t h e f o u r quick-


release fasteners.

g. R e - i n s t a l l cover on cargo compartment p a n e l l i n g .


92 - 23 Inspection and maintenance - voltage regulators

NOTE Refer t o paragraph 92-17 f o r checking and adjustment of


t h e generator v o l t a g e .
1. Check v o l t a g e r e g u l a t o r f o r e x t e r n a l damage and darnaged p l u g c o n t a c t s .
2. Check monitoring and f a u l t p r o t e c t i o n f u n c t i o n s of v o l t a g e r e g u l a t o r and
c a r r y o u t f u n c t i o n a l test of g e n e r a t o r system (see paragraph 92-24).
92 - 24 Functional test - g e n e r a t o r system
1. General

The f u n c t i o n a l test must be c a r r i e d o u t a f t e r having changed one o r more


e l e c t r i c a l components, c a b l e s , e l e c t r i c a l connections, etc. of t h e
g e n e r a t o r system. This test s h a l l be performed on t h e ground with t h e
engines running.
2. Test equipment

- test voltmeter, 0-30V DC, c l a s s 0.5


3. Preparations
a. Connect test voltmeter t o main bus PP21.
b. Connect test voltmeter o r test lamp t o a u x i l i a r y bus (DC socket
2VEG) .
C. S t a r t engine with an e x t e r n a l power source. Both s t a r t e r - g e n e r a t o r
c o n t r o l switches must be i n OFF.
d. Switch on b a t t e r y switch 16P.
e. Disconnect e x t e r n a l power s o u r c e from h e l i c o p t e r . EPU ON i n d i c a t o r
l i g h t must e x t i n g u i s h .
4. Connection of g e n e r a t o r 1 t o t h e l i n e
(engines running a t approx. 1008 N2, b u t w i t h i d e n t i c a l N1 i d l e speed)
a. Set s t a r t e r - g e n e r a t o r c o n t r o l s w i t c h 117P (118P) t o p o s i t i o n GEN.
Generator warning l i g h t p a n e l GEN 1 must e x t i n g u i s h . The test v o l t -
meter connected t o main bus PP21 and v o l t m e t e r 18P must i n d i c a t e
* i d e n t i c a l voltage, 27.0 - 28.OV. I n c a s e t h e r e a d i n g d e v i a t e s from
.rt
t h e s p e c i f i e d v c l t a g e value, a d j u s t v o l t a g e ( r e f e r t o p a r a . 92-17).
>t.
The t e s t voi.tmeter connected t o a u x i l i a r y bus PP22 must not i n d i c a t e
* v o l t a g e o r t h e test lamp must n o t i l l u m i n a t e .
*
B0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 72 Revision 16
EUROCOPTER MAINTENANCE MANUAL B 0 105

5. Connection of generator 2 t o t h e l i n e
(engines running a t approx. 100%N2, but with i d e n t i c a l N 1 i d l e speed) .
a. Set s t a r t e r - g e n e r a t o r c o n t r o l switch 217P (218P) t o p o s i t i o n GEN o r
ON, and set s t a r t e r - g e n e r a t o r c o n t r o l switch 117P (118P) t o p o s i t i o n
OFF. Generator warning l i g h t GEN 2 must extinguish. Generator warning
l i g h t GEN 1 must i l l u m i n a t e . The test voltmeter connected t o main bus
PP21 and voltmeter 18P s h a l l both i n d i c a t e 27-28V. I n case t h e *
reading d e v i a t e s from t h e s p e c i f i e d voltage value, a d j u s t voltage *
( r e f e r t o para. 92-17). The test voltmeter connected t o t h e a u x i l i a r y *
bus PP22 must not i n d i c a t e voltage o r t h e test lamp must not *
illuminate. >
*
b. Deleted

C. Set ammeter s e l e c t o r switch 24P t o p o s i t i o n GEN 2 and switch on a


s u i t a b l e load. The ammeter must i n d i c a t e t h e load current by a
pointer deflection t o the right.
6. Connection of generator 1 and 2 ( p a r a l l e l operation) t o t h e l i n e (engines
running a t approx. 100% N2, but with i d e n t i c a l N 1 i d l e speed).
a. Set both s t a r t e r - g e n e r a t o r c o n t r o l switches t o p o s i t i o n GEN o r ON.
Both generator warning l i g h t s must extinguish. The Test voltmeter
connected t o t h e main bus PP21 and voltmeter 18P must both i n d i c a t e *
27.0 - 28.OV. I n case t h e reading d e v i a t e s from t h e s p e c i f i e d *
voltage value, a d j u s t voltage ( r e f e r t o para. 92-17). The test *
voltmeter connected t o t h e a u x i l i a r y bus PP22 must a l s o i n d i c a t e t h e *
Same v o l t a g e ' o r t h e test lamp must illuminate, whichever i s *
applicable. *

- With emergency bus i n s t a l l e d


- Depress EMERG. DC BUS pushbutton i n d i c a t o r 15P ( 4 1 P ) . I t
must i l l u m i n a t e . With an e x t e r n a l power source connected,
t h e EPU ON i n d i c a t o r l i g h t must extinguish. Check t h a t
t h e r e i s no voltage present on t h e main, a u x i l i a r y and
s t a r t e r busses. Check voltage supply t o emergency bus on
voltmeter 18P. Voltmeter must i n d i c a t e b a t t e r y voltage.
- Set s t a r t e r - g e n e r a t o r c o n t r o l switch t o OFF, then r e t u r n
it t o p o s i t i o n GEN o r ON. Activation of t h e generators
s h a l l not be p o s s i b l e (main, a u x i l i a r y and s t a r t e r busses
s t i l l de-energized) .
- Reset pushbutton i n d i c a t o r 15P ( 4 1 P ) . Check t h a t genera-
t o r s a r e connected t o t h e l i n e , and a l l busses a r e
energized.

B0 105
CHAPTER 92
Revision 16 Page 73
EUROCOPTER MAINTENANCE MANUAL B 0 105

b. Set ammeter s e l e c t o r switch 24P t o c e n t e r p o s i t i o n and switch on a


load. - The ammeter must i n d i c a t e t h e t o t a l c u r r e n t GEN 1 and GEN 2
by p o i n t e r d e f l e c t i o n t o t h e l e f t .
7. Punctional test of a c t i v a t e d generators
a. Switch b a t t e r y switch 16P t o ON and OFF. Check t h a t both genera-
t o r s keep on operating without i n t e r r u p t i o n .
b. Set b a t t e r y switch 16P t o OFF and switch generator 1 on and off with
t h e starter-generator c o n t r o l switch. Generator 2 s h a l l continue t o
operate without any i n t e r r u p t i o n , and generator warning l i g h t GEN 1
s h a l l illuminate when t h e generator i s removed from t h e l i n e and then
extinguish a s soon a s it i s reconnected t o t h e l i n e .
8. Disconnection of t h e generators from t h e l i n e by reverse current
*
*
* NOTE On h e l i c o p t e r models D and DBS-5 with respect t o s t e p s b.
* and e., t h e generators a r e disconnected from t h e l i n e by
* generator r e l a y s 107P and 207P, when t h e l a t t e r a r e
a c t u a t e d by t h e r e s p e c t i v e v o l t a g e r e g u l a t o r s .
a. Set ammeter s e l e c t o r switch 24P t o p o s i t i o n GEN 1.
b. Shut down engine 1. The ammeter 19P momentarily i n d i c a t e s a reverse-
current of approx. 5-10A ( p o i n t e r d e f l e c t i o n t o t h e l e f t ) . The
reverse-current r e l a y 105P then disconnects t h e generator 1 from t h e
h e l i c o p t e r e l e c t r i c a l system. Generator warning l i g h t GEN 1 must
illuminate.
C. Re-start engine 1 and reconnect generator 1 t o t h e l i n e . The
generator warning l i g h t GEN 1 must extinguish.
d. Set ammeter s e l e c t o r switch 24P t o p o s i t i o n GEN 2.
e. Shut down engine 2. The ammeter 19P momentarily i n d i c a t e s a reverse
current of approx. 5-10A ( p o i n t e r d e f l e c t i o n t o t h e l e f t ) . The
reverse-current r e l a y 205P then disconnects t h e generator 2 from t h e
h e l i c o p t e r e l e c t r i c a l system. Generator warning l i g h t GEN 2 must
illuminate.
f . Re-start engine 2 and reconnect generator 2 t o t h e l i n e . The
generator warning l i g h t GEN 2 must extinguish.

B0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 74 Revision 16
EUROCOPTER MAINTENANCE MANUAL B 0 105

9. Functional test of switches llOP and 210P


*
NOTE The functional test is only necessary on helicopter *
models CB-5 and CBS-5. Helicopter models C and S after *
accomplishment of ASB-B0105-80-118 andlor SB-B0105-80-119.
*
a. Press switches llOP and 210P in overhead panel momentarily to "GEN *
TRIPv. Both indicators "GENlW and "GEN2" in instrument panel must *
+"
come On.
*
The main busses PP21 in the main relay box 1VE are conducting battery .,.
voltage.
The test voltmeter connected to the auxiliary bus PP22 must not *
indicate voltage or the test lamp must not illuminate. *
*
b. Press and hold switch llOP for approx. 2 sec. in "GEN1 RES" *
position . *
Indicator "GEN1" goes off. *
The main busses PP21 are conducting generator voltage. *
The test voltmeter connected to the auxiliary bus PP22 must not *
indicate voltage or the test lamp must not illuminate. *
*
C. Press and hold switch 210P for approx. 2 sec. in "GEN2 RES" position. *
Indicator "GEN2" goes off. *
The main busses PP21 are supplied by both generators *
The test voltmeter connected to the auxiliary bus PP22 must not *
indicate voltage or the test lamp must not illuminate. *
*

B0 105
CHAPTER 92
Revision 16 Page 74A/B
MBB HELICOPTERS
MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB - B0 105
92-25 B a t t e r y p o w e r s y s t e m

The battery power system comprises:

- battery 1P
- battery relay 6P
- battery switch 16P
- battery overheat warning l i g h t (see paragraph 92-34).
For locations r e f e r t o paragraph 92-26
1. General

The battery power system provides power t o the DC power system when both
generators a r e disconnected, when t h e external power source i s
disengaged, and during emergency operation ( r e f e r t o paragraph 92-11) .
2. Battery relay 6P

EFFECTIVITY o Series A, C, D
The battery relay 6P i s located on t h e battery
block i n t h e nose section.
o Series S
The battery relay 6P i s located underneath t h e
engine deck ( i n f l i g h t direction forward of the
battery) .
When energized, the battery relay (battery switch s e t t o EPU OFF-BATT ON)
routes the battery voltage t o t h e main bus PP21 and s t a r t e r bus PP1.
3. Battery switch (master switch) 16P
The battery switch i s located on t h e lower right side of the instrument
panel. The single or dual-pole toggle switch i s used t o energize the
battery relay 6P and the a w i l i a r y relay 26P or the external power relay
7P respectively ( f o r e f f e c t i v i t y see figures 92-16, 92-17 and 92-18).

With the single-pole toggle switch s e t i n position ON, t h e battery relay


6P and the auxiliary relay 26P a r e simultaneously energized.
The energized battery relay completes the battery power c i r c u i t t o the
helicopter e l e c t r i c a l system and t h e auxiliary relay simultaneously
interrupts the e x c i t e r c i r c u i t of t h e external power relay 7P. This
ensures t h a t no external power source can be connected t o t h e l i n e
simultaneously. With t h e dual-pole toggle switch i n s t a l l e d and s e t t o
position EPU OFF-BATT ON, the battery relay 6P i s energized and the
exciter c i r c u i t of t h e external power relay 7P interrupted a t the same
time, thereby preventing t h e external power source from being connected
t o the l i n e simultaneously.

B0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 75
'MBB HELICOPTERS
MAINTENANCE MANüAL MBB - B0 105
92 - 26 Battery

The battery serves a s an emergency power source and provides engine s t a r t i n g


power and back-up power f o r the generators, which charge the battery during
normal operation.
The battery consists of 19 or 20 (optional) p l a s t i c c e l l s w i t h nicke1 cadmium
plates, w i t h a rated voltage of 24V when f u l l y charged.
Ventilation of the battery i s v i a vent tubes which a r e routed overboard. A
temperature warning systern ( r e f e r t o para 92-34) ensures safe operation of
the battery.

EFFECTIVITY o Series A, C, D
The battery i s located i n t h e nose section forward of t h e
instrument panel 2VE and i s accessible through a cover on
the front of the helicopter.
o Series S
The battery i s located on t h e a f t RH side of t h e engine
deck and i s accessible through a cover i n t h e engine
cowling .

92 - 27 Removal and i n s t a l l a t i o n - battery


CAUTI ON I T IS ESSENTIAL T0 AVOID SHORT-CIRCUITING
THE BATTERY CONNECTORS.
SHORT CIRCUIT CURRENTS OF MORE THAN
1400A ARE POSSIBLE.
1. Removal (see f i g . 92-29)

a. Set battery switch t o OFF.


b. Open battery access door.
C. Unlock connector (11) and disconnect from battery.
Disconnect connector (12) of the battery temperature warning system.
e. Loosen clamps (5) and disconnect vent tubes from battery case.

CAUTION SECURE VENT TUBES WITH OPEN ENDS UP OR PINCH OFF OPEN
ENDS SO THAT NO ELECTROLYTE RESIDUE CAN DRIP ON T0
STRUCTURAL PARTS.

f. ~ o o s e nboth wing nuts (3) a f t e r removal of t h e spring ( 2 ) .

B0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 76
MAINTENANCE MANUAL BO 105

CAUTION AVOID TILTING THE BATTERY UPON REMOVAL. DO NOT OPEN BATTERY
COVER WHEN BATTERY IS STILL INSTALLED IN THE HELICOPTER.

g. Lift battery from support (9).

2. Installation

a. Inspect battery for visible damage.

b. Inspect battery support and vent tubes prior to the installation of the battery, and clean, as required.

c. Install battery in support (9).

d. Insert hold--down bolts (8) through slotted lug on battery cover (1), secure with wing nuts (3) (channel
positioned with flanges down), and install the spring (2).

e. Slide on vent tubes and secure with clamps (5).

f. Re--connect connector for battery temperature warning system.

g. Re--connect and lock battery connector (11).

h. Perform functional test of the DC power system, battery (refer to paragraph 92--17).

i. Inspect working area for foreign objects.

k. Close battery access door.

92 -- 28 Inspection and Maintenance -- battery

1. General

a. Check battery connector (figure 92--29, 11) and cables for faulty insulation and other damage.

-- For the replacement of the battery cables, loosen the two screws from the battery connector and remove
the forward half shell.
When new battery cables are installed, ensure that the cable terminals are in a centered position. First,
the washer is installed on the cable terminal, then the spring washer and the nut. Torque--tighten nut to
11.5 -- 15.5 Nm. Then the half shell is fitted and tightened.

b. Check battery receptacle for unimpaired condition.

c. Check that battery case is free from spilled electrolyte or alkaline deposits. If these are present, remove
the battery and clean the battery case (see VARTA Battery Maintenance Manual).

NOTE Maintenance of nickel--cadmium batteries shall be performed at battery shops only.


Refer to VARTA Battery Maintenance Manual.

Revision 26 CHAPTER 92
Page 77
MAINTENANCE MANUAL BO 105

6
1 2
5 3
7 4

12 6

11 9

10

5
BO105_WAH_1476_R

1 Battery cover 7 Vent tube


2 Securing spring 8 Hold--down bolts
3 Wing nut 9 Battery support
4 U--plate 10 Screw
5 Clamp 11 Battery connector
6 Vent tube elbow 12 Connector

Figure 92--29 Removal and installation -- battery

CHAPTER 92
Page 78
MAINTENANCE MANUAL BO 105

2. Testing the battery charge

a. Set battery switch respectively BATT EPU or BATTERY MASTER toggle switch to ON.

-- The voltmeter on instrument panel 2VE must indicate between 24V and 28V.

b. Energize all four fuel pumps via switches on overhead panel 12VE.

-- The indicated battery voltage must not drop below 24V within one minute.

c. Switch off fuel pumps.

92 -- 29 Functional test -- battery power system

1. General
The functional test must be carried out each time one or more electrical components, cables, electrical con-
nections, units etc. of the battery power system are replaced. This test shall only be performed on the
ground with the engines operating or shut down.

2. Test Equipment

-- 1 Test voltmeter 0--30V, class 0,5

-- 1 VTVM with automatic polarity switch over

-- 1 Load bank 50--100A

-- 1 Test lamp

3. Functional test

a. Battery operation

1) Check that all fuses and circuit breakers are installed in the main relay box and instrument panel.

2) Set battery switch 16P to ON position. Check that battery voltage indicated on the voltmeter 18P
is 24V.

3) To check voltage on the auxiliary bus PP22, connect test voltmeter to DC socket 2VEG and push
circuit breaker DC SOCKET. There must be no voltage indication on the voltmeter.

Revision 26 CHAPTER 92
Page 79
MAINTENANCE MANUAL BO 105

4) To check battery current, pull all circuit breakers and place ammeter selector switch 24P to each
of its three positions in turn. Ammeter 19P must not indicate current in any of the three switch posi-
tions.

5) Set ammeter selector switch to center position and switch on a load (e.g. main tank fuel pump).
Ammeter 19P must indicate the load current (pointer deflection to the left). No current indication
must be present in the two other switch positions.

b. EPU operation

1) Set battery switch 16P to position ON or EPU ON -- BATT OFF.

2) Connect an external power source to the external power receptacle 2P. The EPU ON indicator light
and both generator warning lights GEN 1 and GEN 2 must illuminate.

3) Check that the applied external power source voltage (approx. 27.5V) is indicated on the voltmeter
18P.

4) To check voltage on the auxiliary bus PP22, connect test voltmeter to DC socket 2VEG and push
circuit breaker DC SOCKET. The voltage indication on the test voltmeter must correspond to that
on the voltmeter 18P.

5) Place battery switch 16P to position ON or BATT ON -- EPU OFF. The voltmeter 18P must indicate
the battery voltage (24V). (The external power supply is disconnected from the helicopter electrical
system by setting the battery switch to ON). No voltage must be present on the auxiliary bus PP22
(test voltmeter).

c. Emergency bus supply (if installed),


(with battery and external power source connected).

1) Switch off EMERG. DC BUS pushbutton indicator l5P (41P) and set battery master switch 16P to
OFF or EPU ON -- BATT OFF. Check that voltmeter 18P indicates the external power source volt-
age (approx. 27.5V). The EPU ON indicator light 27P and GEN 1/GEN 2 warning lights must illumi-
nate.

2) Connect test voltmeter to main bus PP21 (refer to wiring diagram) and to auxiliary bus PP22 (DC
socket). Both busses must be supplied with voltage. Check voltage supply to emergency bus on
the voltmeter 18P.

3) Set battery master switch 16P to position ON or EPU OFF -- BATT ON. The main bus and emer-
gency bus must be supplied with battery power, whereas no voltage must be present on the auxiliary
bus.

CHAPTER 92
Page 80
'MBB HELICOPTERS
MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB B0 105 -
4) Depress EMERG. DC BUS pushbutton i n d i c a t o r 15P (41P). It must
illuminate, and t h e EPU ON i n d i c a t o r l i g h t must extinguish. No
voltage must'be p r e s e n t on t h e main bus, a u x i l i a r y bus and
s t a r t e r bus (generator warning l i g h t s must e x t i n g u i s h ) . Check
voltmeter f o r i n d i c a t i o n of b a t t e r y power on emergency bus.

5) Set b a t t e r y master switch 16P i n p o s i t i o n OFF o r EPU ON BATT -


0FF.The main, a u x i l a r y and s t a r t e r busses must remain de-ener-
gized (Disconnection of t h e e x t e r n a l power source i s not
possible) .

6) Set b a t t e r y master switch 16P i n p o s i t i o n ON o r EPU OFF-


BATT ON. The main, a u x i l i a r y and s t a r t e r buses must remain de-
.energized (Normal b a t t e r y connection i n t e r r u p t e d ) .

7) Set b a t t e r y master switch 16P t o OFF o r EPU ON/BATT OFF


8) Switch o f f EMERG. DC BUS pushbutton i n d i c a t o r 15P ( 4 1 P ) . It must
extinguish, and EPU ON i n d i c a t o r l i g h t i l l u m i n a t e . Check t h a t a l l
busses a r e s u p p l i e d from t h e e x t e r n a l power source.

9) Remove a l l test equipment and wiring r e q u i r e d f o r f u n c t i o n a l


testing .
92-30 E x t e r n a l p o w e r s y s t e m
The e x t e r n a l power system comprises:
- e x t e r n a l power r e c e p t a b l e 2P
- e x t e r n a l power r e l a y 7P
- power supply r e l a y 8P
- a u x i l i a r y r e l a y 26P
- EPU i n d i c a t o r l i g h t 27P
- b a t t e r y switch 16P
For l o c a t i o n s of components, r e f e r t o paragraph 92-8.
1. General

The e x t e r n a l power system s u p p l i e s power from an e x t e r n a l power source t o


t h e busses ( r e f e r a l s o t o paragraph 92-12). This power supply i s used f o r
ground maintenance and a s t h e normal source of power f o r s t a r t i n g t h e
engines.

B 0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 81
MBB HELICOPTERS
MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB - B0 105
2. External power r e l a y 7P
The relay 7P i s located on t h e battery block. When t h e relay i s
energized, it connects t h e external power supply t o t h e main bus PP21
(figures 92-14 and 92-15).
3. Power supply r e l a y 8P
When energized, t h e relay feeds control voltage t o t h e auxiliary bus
relay 10P, thus connecting external power t o t h e a u x i l i a r y bus a s well
(see figures 92-14 and 92-15) .
4. Battery switch 16P

The battery switch controls t h e actuation of t h e a u x i l i a r y relay and


b a t t e r y relay. These relays control changeover from battery t o external
power (figures 92-14 and 92-15).
5. Auxiliary relay

EFFECTIVITY S/N 7 - 160


The auxiliary relay 26P i s located on t h e b a t t e r y block (nose s e c t i o n ) .
The dual-pole relay, when de-energized ( b a t t e r y switch i n the OFF po-
s i t i o n ) , connects the control voltage from t h e external power receptacle
t o t h e EPU ON indicator l i g h t and t o t h e f i e l d c o i l of t h e external power
relay 70 and t h e power supply relay 8P ( f i g u r e 92-14).
6. EPU ON indicator l i g h t

NOTE External power can only be connected t o t h e l i n e when t h e


battery switch i s s e t t o BATT OFF position.
The EPU ON indicator l i g h t 27P i s located on t h e lower r i g h t side of t h e
instrument panel, and illurninates whenever t h e b a t t e r y switch i s s e t t o
BATT OFF and an external power source i s connected t o t h e external power
receptacle and energized ( f i g u r e s 92-14 and 92-18) .

B0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 82
MAINTENANCE MANUAL BO 105

92 -- 31 External power receptacle


The external power receptacle is located on the battery block in the nose section. It is the plug--in point for a
28Vdc external power source which delivers 700 amp starting power and 200 amp continuous power.
The external power connector has one negative and two positive pins. The shorter of the two positive pins con-
trols the external power relay and does not energize it until the external power source is connected tightly to
the other positive pin, thus preventing charring of the contacts.

92 -- 32 Inspection and maintenance -- external power receptacle

CAUTION WHEN WORKING ON THE EXTERNAL POWER RECEPTACLE MAKE SURE THAT
BATTERY CONNECTOR 1P IS REMOVED AND THAT NO EXTERNAL POWER
SOURCE IS CONNECTED. PROTECT AGAINST INADVERTENT CONNECTION.

1. Check attachment of busses for proper seat.

2. Check insulation of busses and cables for charring and other damage.

3. Check condition of fuses / circuit breakers 25P and 30P.

92 -- 33 Functional test -- external power system

1. General
The functional test must be carried out each time one or more electrical components, cables, electrical con-
nections, etc. of the external power receptacle are replaced. This test shall be performed on the ground
with the engines shut down.

2. Test equipment

-- Test voltmeter, 0--30 V DC, class 0.5

3. Preparations

-- engines must be shut down

-- battery switch respectively BATT EPU or BATTERY MASTER set to OFF

-- generator switches STARTER/GENERATOR respectively ENG.I -- ENG.II set to OFF

-- external power unit disconnected.

4. Performance of test

a. Connect the external power unit to the external power receptacle 2P and switch on.

-- External control light 27P (series A, C, D S/N 7--160) and EPU ON indicator (series A, C, S S/N
161 and subsq.) illuminate

b. Set battery switch respectively BATT EPU or BATTERY MASTER toggle switch to ON.

-- warning lights GEN 1 and 2 illuminate in red (only S/N 61 and subsq. and Series D)

Revision 26 CHAPTER 92
Page 83
MAINTENANCE MANUAL BO 105

-- voltmeter 18P on instrument panel 2VE indicates application of external power (28V)
-- connect test voltmeter to pin 10 or 11 of receptacle 2VEP and ground
-- Test voltmeter indicates external voltage if circuit breakers 1R and 2R are depressed
c. Press EMERG. DC BUS pushbutton indicator (only S/N 161 and subsq. and Series D) to activate emer-
gency power mode.
-- warning lights GEN 1 and GEN 2 illuminate red (only S/N 161 and subsequent and Series D)
-- voltmeter 18P on instrument panel 2VE indicates the battery voltage (24V -- 28V).
d. Press EMERG. DC BUS pushbutton indicator again to deactivate emergency power mode. Set battery
switch respectively BATT EPU or BATTERY MASTER toggle switch to OFF.
-- warning lights GEN 1 and GEN 2 must extinguish
-- voltmeter 18P on instrument panel 2VE indicates no voltage
e. Disconnect voltmeter.
f. Disconnect external power supply from external power receptacle 2P.

92 -- 33A Removal and installation -- EPU annunciator

1. Disconnect battery (refer to para 92--26).


2. Loosen the instrument panel (2, fig. 92--29A) and open it.
3. Disconnect the wires from the annunciator (5) and insulate the wire ends.

NOTE The old version of annunciator (5) has a larger diameter and is installed without centring
washer (1) and washer (3).
4. Remove the nut (4) and pull out the annunciator (5).

5. Insert the new annunciator (5) with centring washer (1) and washer (3) and tighten it (5) with the nut (4).
6. Connect the wires to the annunciator (5).

7. Secure the instrument panel (2).

8. Connect battery (refer to para 92--26).

1 2 3 4 5

1 Centring washer
2 Instrument panel
3 Washer
4 Nut
BO105_WAH_3644_R

5 Annunciator

Figure 92--29A EPU annunciator new

CHAPTER 92 Revision 27
Page 84
.MBB HELICOPTERS'
MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB - B0 105
92-34 M o n i t o r i n g DC p o w e r s y s t e m

The following monitoring'systems are i n s t a l l e d i n t h e DC power system:


- voltmeter and ammeter
- generator f a i l u r e warning
. - external power engagement warning
- generator overheat warning
- battery temperature warning
92 - 34A Voltmeter and ammeter (see figure 92-30)
The monitoring system comprises t h e voltmeter 18P, ammeter 19P, a t e s t point
selector switch 24P, and three shunts 20P, 21P and 22P.
For component locations r e f e r t o paragraph 92-8.
1. Voltage measuring equipment

The voltmeter 18P i s located on the upper right side of the instrument
panel 2VE right above t h e ammeter. The voltmeter i s connected t o main bus
PP21 and indicates t h e momentary value of the connected power source.

Battery operation: battery voltage check = 24V


External power operation: EPU voltage check = 28V
Generator operation: system voltage check = 27V and 29V

2. Current measuring equipment


The ammeter 19P i s located on the upper r i g h t side of the instrument
panel 2VE. Depending upon t h e position of the ammeter selector switch
24P, the ammeter w i l l indicate e i t h e r the power supply by or t h e load
current of the generator 1, generator 2 or the main bus PP21. The
ammeter has a measuring range of -150A t o t150A w i t h a Zero indi-
cation i n the Center of the scale.
3. Ammeter selector switch
The ammeter selector switch 24P i s located d i r e c t l y below the
ammeter. I t i s a toggle switch with three positions f o r connecting
the ammeter t o the respective c i r c u i t s ( r e f e r t o t a b l e ) .
4. Shunts
Three shunts 21P, 22P and 20P a r e located i n the main c i r c u i t s of
generator 1 ( 2 1 P ) and generator 2 (22P), and main bus respectively
(20P) .
To measure one of t h e c i r c u i t s a shunt i s connected i n p a r a l l e l t o
the ammeter via the ammeter selector switch.

B0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 85
MBB HELICOPTERS
MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB -
B0 105

Figure 92-30 Voltmeter and armneter


B0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 86
MBB HELICOPTERS
MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB B0 105 -

Ammeter Arnmeter Armneter


Lef t Scale Range Selector Switch Ftight Scale Range
-150A t o 0 Setting 0 t o t150A

Generator operation Generator operation:


(parallel):
Reverse current GEN 1 GEN 1 ( l e f t ) Current generated by GEN 1
Reverse current GEN 2 GEN 2 ( r i g h t ) Current generated by GEN 2
Total current GEN 1 BAT o r BUS
and GEN 2 (center position)

EPU operation:
Current supplied
-- BAT o r BUS
by EPU
Battery operation:
Load current BAT o r BUS

Table 92-4 Arnmeter s e l e c t o r switch

92 - 34B Generator f a i l u r e warning


The warning l i g h t 23P i s located on t h e warning panel i n t h e center of the
instrument panel 2VE. It contains two display captions marked GEN 1 and GEN
2, which w i l l illuminate red, when a generator f a i l s o r i s switched o f f .
Operation of t h e lamps i s t e s t e d by depressing t h e warning l i g h t t e s t switch
6EB.
92 - 34C External power engagement warning

EFFECTIVITY o S/N 7 - 160


The yellow, round EPU ON-indicator l i g h t 27P i s located
on t h e instrument panel above t h e b a t t e r y master switch
16P. During EPU operation w i t h b a t t e r y switch s e t t o BATT
O F F ~ E P UON, voltage i s fed via a contact of t h e auxiliary
r e l a y 26P t o t h e i n d i c a t o r l i g h t , which w i l l illuminate
yellow .

B0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 87
MBB HELICOPTERS
MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB - B0 105

o S/N 161 and subsequent and S s e r i e s


The yellow, Square EPU ON i n d i c a t o r l i g h t 27P i s located
on t h e instrument panel above t h e b a t t e r y master switch
16P. When t h e external power supply i s engaged and
switched On, the four lamps of t h e indicator l i g h t w i l l
be energized and l i g h t up t h e EPU ON caption. Operation
of a l l four lamps i s t e s t e d by depressing the warning
l i g h t t e s t switch 6EB.
o D s e r i e s and IFR
Same a s S/N 161 and subsq., except t h a t the EMERG. DC BUS
pushbutton indicator switch 41P/15P must not be
depressed.

92 - 34D Generator overheat warning

EFFECTIVITY D s e r i e s only

Th'is warning indicates overheating of generators. It c o n s i s t s of two


thermo-switches 3DA and 4DA on t h e two generators and a red warning l i g h t 2DA
i n s t a l l e d i n instrument panel 2VE.
I f t h e generator temperature exceeds 205 O C , t h e respective warning l i g h t
"GEN 1 O/H or GEN 2 O/Hn i s switched on by t h e thermo switch.

92 - 34E Battery temperature warning (See f i g u r e 92-31)


Purpose of the system i s t o indicate any overheating of t h e battery.
Indication i s via two warning l i g h t s marked BAT 60 and BAT 70, which a r e
controlled by two temperature switches i n s t a l l e d i n t h e b a t t e r y . These
switches activate a t d i f f e r e n t b a t t e r y temperatures.

NOTE When the warning l i g h t BAT 60 illuminates, t h e battery


must be disconnected from t h e e l e c t r i c a l system.
a . Warning l i g h t

EFFECTIVITY o S/N 7 60 -
The warning l i g h t 1WP i s located on the instrument
panel next t o the ammeter s e l e c t o r switch 24P.
o S/N 61 and subsequent and D s e r i e s
The warning l i g h t 1WP i s located on the warning
panel of t h e instrument panel 2VE.
When a battery temperature of 60°C (140°F) i s reached, warning l i g h t
BAT 60 illuminates red. I f 70°C (160°F) i s reached the red warning
l i g h t BAT 70 w i l l additionally illuminate. The 4 lamp bulbs a r e
functionally t e s t e d by pressing pushbutton I i n d i c a t o r 6EB.

B0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 88
MBB HELICOPTERS
MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB -
B0 105

MAlN BUS

1WP

BAT 60
4WP
BAT 70

WARNING LIGHT

900222

Figure 92-31 Battery Temperature Warning System

92 - 35 Battery temperature switches

Both temperature switches 2WP and 3WP (see figure 92-31) are screwed onto two
c e l l connectors within the battery. Temperature switch 2WP i s s e t t o a
temperature of 60°C (140°F). I f t h e battery temperature reaches 60 O C , the
temperature switch w i l l close and complete the c i r c u i t t o the l i g h t BAT 60,
which w i l l illuminate. The temperature switch 3WP i s Set t o close a t 70 O C
(160 F ) , thereby activating both warning l i g h t s BAT 60 and BAT 70.

NOTE A t high ambient temperatures andlor as a r e s u l t


of incorrect maintenance of t h e battery, the BAT 60
warning may occur frequently

a) Check battery and temperature switch (see paragraph 92-28


and 92-37).

b) Check generator voltage s e t t i n g . Reduce voltage


i n case of high ambient temperatures (see paragraph
92-17).

B0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 89
MBB HELICOPTERS
MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB - B0 105
92 - 36 Removal and i n s t a l l a t i o n - b a t t e r y temperature switches
WARNING THE ELECTROLYTE (POTASSIUM HYDROXIDE SOLUTION) IS A STRONG
ALKALINE SOLUTION THAT IS VERY CORROSIVE AND NOXIOUS. IF ANY IS
SPILLED ON CLOTHING, HANDS OR OTHER OBJECTS I T SHOULD BE
NEUTRALIZED WITH BORIC ACID SOLUTION OR FLUSHED AWAY WITH WATER
IMMEDIATELY. WEAR RUBBER GLOVES, RUBBER APRON AND FACE SHIELD
WHEN HANDLING THE ELECTROLYTE.

CAUTION NOTE THAT THE INTERNAL RESISTANCE OE NICKEL-CADMIUM BATTERIES


IS VERY LOW. THE CURRENT FLOW I S EXTREMELY HEAVY (MORE THAN
1400A) I F A FULLY CHARGED BATTERY IS SHORTED.

NOTE The e l e c t r o l y t e l e v e l of t h e cells must not be a d j u s t e d without


knowing t h e s t a t e of b a t t e r y charge. The e l e c t r o l y t e l e v e l of
t h e c e l l s s h a l l be only a d j u s t e d i f t h e b a t t e r y i s f u l l y
charged.

1. Remove b a t t e r y and Open Cover.

2. Remove c e l l connector b a r s and temperature switches.

3. Remove temperature warning r e c e p t a c l e w i t h temperature switches.

92 - 37 Inspection and maintenance - b a t t e r y temperature switches


Remove temperature switches and check them f o r proper functioning, using an
oven, o i l bath o r water bath. Temperature s w i t c h 2WP must c l o s e a t 60°C.
Temperature switch 3WP must c l o s e a t 70°C.
Subsequently, c l e a n t h e temperature switches t o remove r e s i d u a l o i l o r water.

92 - 38 Functional t e s t - DC power system monitoring equipment

1. General

The r e s p e c t i v e p o r t i o n of t h e f u n c t i o n a l t e s t must be c a r r i e d out a f t e r


having changed one o r more e l e c t r i c a l components, c a b l e s , e l e c t r i c a l
connectors, e t c . of t h e monitoring systems.
The t e s t s a r e t o be performed on t h e ground only w i t h t h e engines running
o r shut down.

B0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 90
MBB HELICOPTERS
MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB - B0 105
2. Preparations

- engines must be shut down


- BATTERY MASTER switch or BAT EPU or BATTERY MASTER switch
s e t t o OFF
- EMERG. DC BUS push indicattor s e t OFF

3. Testinq of voltmeter and ammeter

a. Set BATTERY MASTER switch resp. BAT EPU or BATTERY MASTER switch t o
ON.
- Voltmeter indicates battery voltage.

b. S t a r t engines and l e t run i n GROUND IDLE.


Lock-on generators.
- warning l i g h t GEN 1 and GEN 2 extinguish.

C. Connect consumers, l i k e both main f u e l Pumps.


- set ammeter selector switch 24P (see figure 92-30) t o GEN 1
- Ammeter indicates consumer current
d. Set A&ter selector switch t o GEN 2
- Ammeter indicates consumer current

e. Set Ammeter selector switch t o BATT


- Ammeter indicates no consumer current.
f. Switch off engines and consumers. Set BATTERY MASTER switch resp. BAT
EPU switch t o OFF.

4. Functionally t e s t battery temperature and generator overheat warning


l i g h t s . Refer t o paras 92-34D and 92-37.

5. Functionally t e s t external power engagement warning l i g h t . Refer t o


paragraph 92-34C.
6. Functionally t e s t generator f a i l u r e warning l i g h t . Refer t o paragraph
92-34B.

92 - 39 STARTER AND IGNITION SYSTEM

Each enqine has i t s own s t a r t e r and i g n i t i o n system (see figures 92-33 and
92-34).
These Systems a r e used t o s t a r t both engines, one a f t e r the other, but not
both a t the same time.

B0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 9 1
MBB HELICOPTERS
MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB - B0 105
92 - 40 Locations - S t a r t e r and i g n i t i o n system

Starter-generators Engines 1 and 2


1 and 2, 103P and 203P (see chapter 61)
S t a r t e r r e l a y s 1 and 2 Main r e l a y box 1VE 92-4 t o 92-7
103J and 203J
Warning l i g h t s 3 J Instrument panel 2VE 92-32
only S e r i e s D
Toggle switches STARTER- Instrument panel 2VE 92-32
GENERATOR resp. GENERATOR
ENG. I and ENG. 11, 117P
and 217P
C i r c u i t breaker 1J Instrument panel 2VE
C i r c u i t breaker lJ, 25 only S e r i e s D
Diodes D102J, D202J Main r e l a y box 1VE
Ignition units Engine 1 and 2
105J, 205J
I g n i t i o n switch Instrument panel 2VE
1045, 204J
Starter/Ignition Only S e r i e s D
switch 1085, 208J
I g n i t i o n plugs Engine 1 and 2
106J, 2065 (see chapter 61)

Table 92-5 Location, S t a r t e r and i g n i t i o n system

B0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 92
MBB HELICOPTERS
MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB - B0 105

1 Instrument panel (2VE) 2 Main relay box (1VE)


Circuit breaker "STARTERSn 1J S t a r t e r relays (103J, 203J)
"STARTER-GENERATORn switch 3 Starter-generator (203P)
(117P, 217P) 4 Spark igniter (206J)
5 Ignition e x c i t e r (205J)
EFFECTIVITY Series D 6 Spark i g n i t e r (1065)
7 Starter-generator (103P)
Circuit breaker "STARTERS 1-11" 8 Ignition e x c i t e r (1055)
(1Jr 2J)
"STARTER/IGNITIONn switch
(lO8J, 208J)
Warning l i g h t (3J)

Figure 92-32 S t a r t e r and Ignition System

B0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 93/94
.MBB HELICOPTERS'
-
MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB B0 105

MAlN BUS
b

ClRCUlT BREAKER

IGNlTlON SWITCH

see 92-7
STARTERBUS

I'

900126

Figure 92-33 S t a r t e r and Ignition System

B0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 95
MBB HELICOPTERS
MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB B0 105 -

EFFECTIVITY Series D

MAlN BUS
PP21 2-8v-
I

WARNING LIGHT 3J WARNING LIGHT 3J

--

SPARK
IGNITER

STARTER-GENERATOR

900153

Figure 92-34 Starter and Ignition System

B0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 96
MBB HELICOPTERS
MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB - B0 105

92 - 41 Protection of c i r c u i t s of s t a r t e r and i g n i t i o n system

The following c i r c u i t breakers a r e provided t o protect t h e s t a r t e r and


i g n i t i o n system.

CIRCUIT BREAKER PROTECTED CIRCUIT LOCATION IDENTIFICATION


CODE PROTECTION

I g n i t i o n system Instrument STARTERS


engine 1 and 2, panel 2VE
s t a r t e r relay
103J, 2035

Series D
I g n i t i o n system Instrument STARTERS
engine 1 and 2, panel 2VE 1-11
s t a r t e r relay
103J, 2035, and
warning l i g h t 3J

Table 92-6 Protection, S t a r t e r and i g n i t i o n system

92 - 42 Troubleshooting - S t a r t e r and Ignition System

NO. TROUBLE SYMPTOM PROBABLE CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION

1 Starter-generator 103P Defective c i r c u i t Replace


(LH engine) f a i l s t o breaker 1J
operate during s t a r t i n g
procedure. Ignition i s "STARTER-GENERATORn Replace
not possible switch 117P defect-
tive

Table 92-7 Troubleshooting - S t a r t e r and i g n i t i o n system (1 of 4 )

B0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 97
.MBB HELICOPTERS'
MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB - B0 105
TROUBELSHOOTING (continued)

NO.TROUBLE SYMPTOM PROBABLE CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION

EFFECTIVITY Series D
Def ective "STARTER/ Replace .
IGNITIONn switch 1085.

Defective s t a r t e r Replace .
relay 2035.
Defective e l e c t r i - Check wiring for continuity
c a l wiring. using t h e applicable wiring
diagram ( r e f e r t o WDM) .
Replace defective wiring.
2 Starter-generator 103P Defective s t a r t e r Replace .
f a i l s t o operate relay 1035.
during s t a r t i n g
procedure.Ignition Defective s t a r t e r - Remove starter-generator
of engine i s possible. generator 103P. and repair or replace, a s
necessary ( r e f e r t o 92-20,
check brushes f o r general
condition) .

Defective e l e c t r i - Check wiring f o r continuity


c a l wiring. using t h e applicable wiring
diagram ( r e f e r t o WDM) . Re-
place defective wiring.
3 Starter-generator 203P Defective c i r c u i t Replace.
(RH engine) f a i l s t o breaker 1J.
operate during s t a r t i n g
procedure. Ignition Defective "STARTER- Replace.
i s not possible. GENERATORn switch
217P.

EFFECTIVITY Se.ries D
Defective c i r c u i t Replace .
breaker 25.

Table 92-7 Troubleshooting - S t a r t e r and i g n i t i o n system ( 2 of 4 )

B0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 98
MBB HELICOPTERS'
'

MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB - B0 105


TROUBLESHOOTING ( cont inued)

NO. TROUBLE SYMPTOM PROBABLE CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION

Defective "STARTER- Replace .


GENERATORn s w i t ch
208J.
Defective s t a r t e r Replace .
relay 1035.
Defective e l e c t r i - Check wiring f o r continuity
c a l wiring. using the applicable wiring
diagram ( r e f e r t o WDM) . Re-
place defective wiring.

Starter-generator 203P Defective s t a r t e r Replace .


(RH engine) f a i l s t o relay 2035.
operate during s t a r t i n g
'procedure. Ignition of Defective s t a r t e r - Replace .
engine i s possible. generator 203P.
Defective e l e c t r i - Check wiring for continuity
c a l wiring. using the applicable wiring
.diagram ( r e f e r t o WDM. Re-
place defective wiring.

Ignition of LH engine Defective "IGNITION Replace .


i s not possible, switch 1 0 4 J .
although s t a r t e r -
generator 103P i s Defective i g n i t i o n Replace.
operat ing . e x c i t e r 1055.
Defective spark Replace.
i g n i t e r 106J.
Defective e l e c t r i - Check wiring for continuity
c a l wiring. using t h e applicable wiring
diagram ( r e f e r t o WDM) . Re-
place defective wiring.

EFFECTIVITY Series D

Def ective "STARTER/ Replace .


I G N I T I O N n switch
108J.

Table 92-7 Troubleshooting - S t a r t e r and ignition system (3 of 4 )

B0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 99
MBB HELICOPTERS
MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB B0 105 -
TROUBLESHOOTING (continued)

NO.TROUBLE SYMPTOM PROBABLE CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION

6 Ignition of RH engine Defective " I G N I T I O N n Replace .


i s not possible, switch 2045.
although s t a r t e r -
generator 203P i s Defective ignition Replace .
operating. e x c i t e r 2055.
Defective spark Replace .
i g n i t o r 2065.
Defective e l e c t r i - Check wiring f o r continuity
c a l wiring. using the applicable wiring
diagram ( r e f e r t o WDM) . Re-
place defective wiring.

EFFECTIVITY Series D
Defective "STARTER/ Replace switch
I G N I T I O N n switch
2085.

Table 92-7 Troubleshooting - S t a r t e r and i g n i t i o n system ( 4 of 4)

92 - 43 Inspection - s t a r t e r and i g n i t i o n system

SWITCH OFF ANY ELECTRICAL POWER SUPPLY PRIOR T0


WORKING ON THE STARTER AND I G N I T I O N SYSTEM. MAKE
SURE THAT IGNITION LEADS ARE PROPERLY CONNECTED.
TAKE ALL SAFETY MEASURES REQUIRED FOR WORK ON
HIGH VOLTAGE INSTALLATIONS.

1. Check the ignition system regularly f o r


- defective insulation of high voltage leads
- condition of ignition plugs
- condition of high voltage connectors.

2. Check starter-generators f o r proper seating of terminals.

B0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 1 0 0
MBB HELICOPTERS
MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB - B0 105
92-44 S t a r t e r s y s t e m

The s t a r t e r system consists of:

- two starter-generators, 103P and 203P


- two s t a r t e r relays, 103J and 2035
- one s t a r t e r warning l i g h t 3J each (only S e r i e s D )
- one toggle switch each, STARTER/GENERATOR resp. E N G . 1 and E N G . 1 1
1. General
The engines a r e s t a r t e d by means of two starter-generators operated a s
s e r i e s motors f o r t h i s purpose. This design makes own s t a r t e r s unnec-
essary .
The starter-generators 103P/203P (see f i g u r e s 92-32 and 92-33) are
mounted on t h e gearbox of t h e LH and RH engine. Control of t h e s t a r t e r -
generators i s via two s t a r t e r relays 103J/203J i n s t a l l e d i n t h e main
relay box IVE, which provide connection of starter-generators t o the
s t a r t e r bus PP1.
S t a r t e r relays a r e supplied with e l e c t r i c a l power from t h e main bus PP21
via c i r c u i t breaker 1J "STARTERSnn and "STARTER/GENERATORn switch
.
117P/217P (on the instrument panel) Diodes 1025/202J which a r e connected
i n p a r a l l e l t o t h e s t a r t e r r e l a y c o i l s a r e used f o r a r c suppression..

EFFECTIVITY S e r i e s D (figures 92-32 and 92-34)


S t a r t e r relays a r e supplied w i t h e l e c t r i c a l power from
main bus PP21 v i a c i r c u i t breakers 1J/2J "STARTERS
1-11" and "STARTER/IGNITIONn switches 108J/208J
(on t h e instrument panel) . Warning l i g h t 3J (on the
instrument panel) w i t h legends "START 1" and "START 2"
i n d i c a t e s operation of t h e respective s t a r t e r system
by illumination.
With c i r c u i t breaker 1J pushed and switch 1 1 7 P i n position "STARTn, con-
t r o l voltage flows v i a normally-closed contact of the s t a r t e r relay 203J
t o energizing c o i l of s t a r t e r relay 103J. S t a r t e r relay 1035 i s energized
and completes the c i r c u i t between starter-generator 103P and s t a r t e r bus
PP1. The starter-generator 103P w i l l operate. I n addition, s t a r t e r relay
103J Opens t h e control c i r c u i t of s t a r t e r relay 203J, thus rendering a
simultaneous s t a r t i n g of engine 2 impossible.

B0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 1 0 1
MBB HELICOPTERS'
-
'

MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB B0 105

EFFECTIVITY Series D (figures 92-32 and 92-34)


With c i r c u i t breakers 15/25 pushed and switch 1085 i n
position "VENTn or "STARTn, control voltage flows via
normally-closed contact of the s t a r t e r relay 2035 t o
t h e energizing c o i l of s t a r t e r relay 1035. The s t a r t e r
relay 1035 i s energized and completes the c i r c u i t be-
tween starter-generator 103P and s t a r t e r bus PP1. The
starter-generator 103P w i l l operate. In addition, the
s t a r t e r relay 103J Opens the control c i r c u i t of the
s t a r t e r relay 2035, thus rendering a simultaneous
s t a r t i n g of engine 2 impossible. Furthermore, the
c i r c u i t of the warning l i g h t 35 "START 1" i s completed
and operation of the starter-generator 103P i s indi-
cated respectively.
S t a r t e r relays (see figure 92-35)
The two s t a r t e r relays 1035 and 2035 are i n s t a l l e d i n main relay box 1VE
(see figure 92-4 t o 92-7) .
The s t a r t e r relays connect the respective starter-generators t o t h e main
bus PP21.

B0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 102
MBB HELICOPTERS
MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB - B0 105

1 Nut 9 Bracket
2 Washer 10 Screw
3 E l e c t r i c a l wiring 11 Washer
4 Jumper 12 E l e c t r i c a l wiring
5 Washer 13 Screw
6 Screw 1 4 Washer
7 Clmp 15 Diode
8 Starter relay 16 Main r e l a y box 1VE
Figure 92-35 S t a r t e r Relay
B0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 1031104
MBB HELICOPTERS
MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB B0 105 -
92 - 45 Functional test - starter system

1. General

The f u n c t i o n a l test must be c a r r i e d out a f t e r having changed one o r more


components, cables, e l e c t r i c a l connections, e t c . of t h e s t a r t e r system.
This f u n c t i o n a l t e s t i s performed on t h e ground using e x t e r n a l power.

NOTE A s t h e engines a r e not s t a r t e d , t h e s t a r t e r - g e n e r a t o r s


must be disconnected from power supply.
They a r e t h u s not subjected t o t e s t i n g .

2. Test equipment
- Voltmeter, 0-30V, DC

3. Preparations ( s e e f i g u r e 92-36)
a. Switch o f f e l e c t r i c a l power supply.
' b. Disconnect below l i s t e d l e a d s from t e r m i n a l " C t n of starter-genera-
t o r s 103P/203P:

EFFECTIVITY Starter-Generator 103P 203P


o S/N 7 - 160 Lead J9F4 JllF4
o S/N 161 and up Lead J9F2 JllF2

o Series D
S/N 1 160 - Lead
S/N 161 and up Lead J9E2 JllE2

C. Connect a t e s t voltmeter between disconnected l e a d ( t ) and ground


(-) , (measuring range: 30V DC) .

CAUTION ISOLATE DISCONNECTED LEADS FROM GROUND.

d. Switch on e l e c t r i c a l power supply and push c i r c u i t breaker 1J


"STARTERSn ( o r c i r c u i t breakers 1J and 25 "STARTERS 1-11" f o r
series D ) .

B0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 105
MBB HELICOPTERS
MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB - B0 105

Figure 92-36 Terminal S t r i p of Starter-Generator

Testing of t h e s t a r t e r system

NOTE Testing of t h e s t a r t e r system i s i d e n t i c a l f o r t h e


LH and RH engine, and i s subsequently described
f o r t h e LH engine only.
a. Set switch 117P n ~ ~ ENG. In~ t o p o s i t i~o n "STARTn
~ and ~ /
hold i n p o s i t i o n .

EFFECTIVITY Series D
Set switch 1085 "STARTER/IGNITIONn t o p o s i t i o n
"VENTn .
b. Reading on t e s t voltmeter, connected t o t h e disconnected l e a d of LH
s t a r t e r - g e n e r a t o r , s h a l l be approx. 28V.

EFFECTIVITY Series D
Legend "START 1" on warning l i g h t s h a l l i l l d n a t e .

C. Set switch 217P "STARTERGENERATOR, ENG. IIn t o p o s i t i o n "STARTn and


hold i n p o s i t i o n .

EFFECTIVITY Series D
Set switch 2085 "STARTER/IGNITIONn t o p o s i t i o n
"VENTn .

B 0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 106
MBB HELICOPTERS
MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB - B0 105
d. There s h a l l be no pointer deflection on t h e t e s t voltmeter, connected
t o t h e disconnected lead of RH starter-generator.

EFFECTIVITY Series D
Warning l i g h t "START 2" s h a l l not illuminate.

e. Release switch 1 1 7 P and 217P (1085 and 208J f o r s e r i e s D )


f. Release c i r c u i t breakers 1J and 25 and switch off power supply. D i s -
connect t e s t voltmeter and reconnect leads t o terminal "C+" of
starter-generators 103P and 203P..

92-46 I g n i t i o n s y s t e m

The i g n i t i o n system (see f i g u r e s 92-33 and 92-34) c o n s i s t s of:


- one i g n i t i o n e x c i t e r 105J and 205J each
- one spark i g n i t e r 1065 and 206J each
- one i g n i t i o n cable per engine
1. General
The i g n i t i o n systems a r e activated by s e t t i n g toggle switches 1 0 4 J and
2045 n I G N I T I O N n and 108J/208J "STARTER/IGNITIONn (Series D ) on instrument
panel 2VE (see f i g u r e s 92-11 t o 92-13) t o START. When t h e required
i g n i t i o n voltage i s reached, energy stored i n t h e i g n i t i o n e x c i t e r i s
discharged a t t h e r e l a t e d spark i g n i t e r 106J/206J i n form of an e l e c t r i c
a r c . After t h e discharge, t h i s procedure i s repeated f o r a s long as t h e
i g n i t i o n e x c i t e r is under power.

WARNING WHEN WORKING ON THE I G N I T I O N SYSTEM, DISCONNECT


ELECTRICAL POWER SUPPLY AND SECURE BEFORE
SWITCHING ON AGAIN. DANGER OF HIGH VOLTAGE!

2. Ignition e x c i t e r
The i g n i t i o n e x c i t e r s 105J/205J a r e mounted on t h e gearbox of the LH and
RH engine. They a r e connected v i a shielded i g n i t i o n leads t o t h e spark
i g n i t e r s 106J/206J, which a r e screwed i n t o t h e combustion chambers.
The i g n i t i o n system and t h e s t a r t e r system a r e interconnected such t h a t
.
i g n i t i o n i s only possible during t h e s t a r t i n g procedure.

B0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 1 0 7
MB HELICOPTERS'
MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB - B0 105

3. Spark i g n i t e r
The spark i g n i t e r s 1065 and 206J a r e i n s t a l l e d i n t h e engines. They a r e
used t o i g n i t e t h e engines by means of an a r c discharge.

NOTE For removal and i n s t a l l a t i o n of spark i g n i t e r r e f e r t o ALLISON


Operating and Maintenance Manual (DDA) 250-C20, C20B.
4. I g n i t i o n cable
The two i g n i t i o n cables a r e mounted t o t h e engines. They connect t h e
respective i g n i t i o n e x c i t e r with t h e appropriate spark i g n i t e r .

NOTE For removal and i n s t a l l a t i o n of i g n i t i o n cable r e f e r t o


ALLISON Operating and Maintenance Manual.

92 - 47 Functional test - i g n i t i o n system


1. General
,

Test of t h e i g n i t i o n system i s made a f t e r test of t h e s t a r t e r system.


Therefore, observe preparations f o r f u n c t i o n a l test of t h e s t a r t e r system
(See paragraph 92-45) .
2. Preparations
Refer t o paragraph 92-45.

NOTE Disconnect l e a d from terminal "C+" a s i n paragraph 92-45.

3. Performance of t e s t

CAUT ION DISCONNECTED LEADS MUST BE PROTECTED AND MUST


NOT CONTACT GROUND. DANGER OF SHORT CIRCUITS!

NOTE Testing of t h e i g n i t i o n system i s i d e n t i c a l f o r t h e LH


and RH engine, and i s subsequently described f o r t h e
LH engine only.

a. Set switch 117P "STARTER/GENERATOR, ENG. I n t o p o s i t i o n "STARTn and


hold i n p o s i t i o n .

B 0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 108
MBB HELICOPTERS '

MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB B 0 105 -


b. Set switch 1045 "IGNITION" t o t h e ON position. Ignition noise (loud
crackling) s h a l l be c l e a r l y audible a t i g n i t i o n e x c i t e r 105J and
spark i g n i t e r 106J of LH engine. Set switch 104J t o t h e OFF position.

C. Set switch 204J " I G N I T I O N n t o t h e ON position. There s h a l l be no


i g n i t i o n noise on RH engine. Set switch 2045 t o the OFF position and
release switch 117P "STARTER/GENERATOR, ENG. I n .

d. P u l l c i r c u i t breaker 1J and switch off e l e c t r i c a l power supply.


Disconnect t e s t voltmeter and re-connect leads t o terminal "C+" of
starter-generators .
EFFECTIVITY Series D

e. Set switch 108J n ~ ~ t o position


~ "ONn. ~ Ignition ~ noise ~ ~
(loud crackling) s h a l l be c l e a r l y audible a t i g n i t i o n e x c i t e r 1055
and spark i g n i t e r 106J of t h e LH engine.
f. Functionally t e s t i g n i t i o n system of t h e RH engines a s described f o r
LH engine.

g. P u l l c i r c u i t breaker 1J and 2J and switch off e l e c t r i c a l power


. supply. Disconnect t e s t voltmeter and re-connect leads t o terminal
" C t n of starter-generators.

92 - 48 ENGINE AND MAIN TRANSMISSION SYSTEMS

The e l e c t r i c a l system of engine and rnain transmission systems comprises:


- monitoring systems - engine f i r e detection system

- N2 governor - o i l cooler fan f a i l u r e warning system

- engine anti-icing

B0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 109
MBB HELICOPTERS
MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB - B0 105
92 - 49 Locations - engine and main transmission systems
(see figures 92-37 and 92-39)

Component Locat ion Fig.No. or


Chapter

Warning l i g h t s Instrument panel 2VE See paragraph 92-77


(vertical part)
Circuit breakers Instrument panel 2VE See paragraph 92-50
Instruments Instrument panel 2VE See paragraph 91
Monitoring systems
RPM warning unit 1EW Instrument panel 2VE See paragraph 91-53
Pushbutton 2EW Cyclic s t i c k g r i p 3/4VE See paragraph 92-49
Tachogenerators N 1 102EN Engine 1 and 2 See chapter 61
and 202EN

Tachogenerators N2 lOlEN
and 201EN
Chip detectors l O l E V
and 201EV
Thermocouple l O l E L
and 201EL
O i l pressure transmitter
lOlED and 201ED

O i l temperature trans-
mitter l O l E D and 201ED
Chip detector 102EV
and 202EV
O i l temperature trans-
mitter 102ED and 202ED
Chip detector 5EV Main transmission See chapter 11

Table 92-8 Locations, engine and main transmission systems (1 of 2)

B 0 105
C W T E R 92
Page 110
MBB HELICOPTERS
MAINTENANCE MANIU MBB
T - B0 105
Locations - engine and main transmission systems (continued)

Component Location Fig.No. o r


Chapter

N2 Governor

Actuators 103KA, 203KA Engines 1 and 2 See chapter 61

Relay 4KA, 5KA and 6KA


Relay box lOVE Fig. 92-8, 92-9
Diode board l O K A
Four-w.ay switch 8KA Collective p i t c h Fig. 92-51
s t i c k 5VE

Engine anti- i c i n g System


Toggle switch ENG ANTI Instrument panel 2VE Fig. 92-11 t o 92-13
I C I N G 1 and 2
resp. ENG. ANTI-ICING
I and I1 (Series D )

Actuators 21VE Engines 1 and 2 See chapter 61 and


Fig. 92-54

Table 92-8 Locations, engine and main transmission systems (2 of 2)

B0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 111
MBB HELICOPTERS
- B0 105
'

MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB

92 - 50 Protection of engine and main transmission systems

The following c i r c u i t breakers a r e i n s t a l l e d t o protect t h e engine and main


transmission systems:

CIRCUIT BREAKER PROTECTED CIRCUIT LOCATION


Code Protection

4E 1A Engine RPM indicator Fig. 92-40

5E 1A O i l pressure indicator Fig. 92-40


Engine 1 and 2 and transmission
6E 1A O i l temperature i n d i c a t o r Fig. 92-40
Engine 1 and 2 and transmission
1OE 1A Chip detector warning engine Fig. 92-40

1HL 3A Anti icing, engine 1 Fig. 92-11 t o 92-13

1l H L 3A Anti icing, engine 2 Fig. 92-11 t o 92-13

1WB (1WG) 1A Fire warning, engine 1 Fig. 92-40


2WB (2WG) 1A Fire warning, engine 2 Fig. 92-40

Table 92-9 Protection of engine and main transmission systems

B0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 112
'MBB HELICOPTERS'
MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB -
B0 105

-
1 Instrument Panel 2VE
T r i p l e RPM i n d i c a t o r 7EN
O i l temperature t r a n s m i t t e r 102ED
Chip d e t e c t o r 102EV
T r i p l e o i l temperature
i n d i c a t o r 5ED 4 Chip Detector l O l E N
T r i p l e o i l pressure
i n d i c a t o r 4ED 5 N2 RPM tacho-generator lOlEN
N I RPM i n d i c a t o r 108EN, 208EN
TOT i n d i c a t o r 105EL, 205EL 6 Engine I1 ( r i g h t s i d e )
Variable trim r e s i s t o r 104EL,204EL N 1 RPM tacho-generator 202EN
RPM warning u n i t EW Thermocouple 201EL
Warning l i g h t 3EW O i l pressure t r a n s m i t t e r 201ED
O i l temperature t r a n s m i t t e r 202ED
2 Cyclic S t i c k Grip 3/4V Chip d e t e c t o r 202EV

3 Engine I ( l e f t s i d e ) 7 Chip Detector 201EV


N 1 RPM tacho-uenerator 102EN
Thermoco@le ~ O ~ E L 8 N2 RPM tacho-qenerator 201EN
O i l pressure t r a n s m i t t e r l O l E D

Figure 92-37 Engine Monitoring

B0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 113
MBB HELICOPTERS
MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB - B0 1 0 5

1 Circuit Breaker 1KA 4 Collective Stick Grip


(Copilot) 6VE
2 Relay Box lOVE Four-way switch (beeper) 8KA
Relay 4KA
Relay 5KA 5 Actuator (ENG.1) 103KA
Relay 6KA
~ r i n i e dc i r c u i t board lOKA 6 Actuator ( E N G . 1 1 ) 203KA

3 Collective Stick Grip


( P i l o t ) 5VE
Four-way switch
(beeper) 8KA
Figure 92-38 Engine Monitoring (N2 control)

B0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 114
MBB HELICOPTERS
MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB - B0 105

1 N I RPM i n d i c a t o r 102EN (202EN)


2 N2 RPM i n d i c a t o r l O l E N (201EN)
3 Chip d e t e c t o r l O l E V (201EV)
4 Chip d e t e c t o r 102EV (202EV)
5 Thennocouple assy l O l E L (201EL)

Figure 92-39 Location of Components

B 0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 1151116
MBB HELICOPTERS
MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB -
B0 105

EFFECTIVITY S / N 7-160

INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT PANEL


RH SIDE LH SIDE

EFFECTIVITY S / N 161 and subsequent

INSTRUMENT PANEL
RH SIDE

A EFFECTIVITY For series D only

Figure 92-40 Fuse Panel


B0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 117
MBB HELICOPTERS '
MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB -
B 0 105

92-51 M o n i t o r i n g s y s t e m s

The following monitoring systems a r e i n s t a l l e d t o ensure t h e proper function


of main transmission and engines and t o continually check engine performance:

- RPM control, engines and rotor


- RPM monitoring N 1 and NR
- engine RPM monitoring N2
- chip warning systems f o r engines and main transmission
- o i l pressure monitoring f o r engines and main transmission (refer t o
chapter 91)
- o i l temperature monitoring f o r engines and main transmission ( r e f e r t o
chapter 91)
- TOT monitoring, ( r e f e r t o chapter 91)
- torque monitoring, ( r e f e r t o chapter 91)
The associated instruments and t h e procedures f o r removing and i n s t a l l i n g
them are described i n chapter 91.

92 - 52 RPM monitoring - engines and rotor


Each engine i s provided with two tacho-generators, see f i g u r e 92-40. They
generate an a l t e r n a t i n g voltage whose frequency changes proportionally with
t h e RPM. Tacho-generator 102EN (202EN) i s used t o control t h e compressor RPM
N 1 and tacho-generator l O l E N (201EN) t o control t h e power turbine RPM N2. The
AC voltage produced by t h i s tacho-generator i s a l s o used t o drive the
synchronous motors of t h e t r i p l e RPM indicator 7EN.
The main transmission i s a l s o provided w i t h a tacho-generator 3EN. The AC
voltage produced by t h i s tacho-generator i s used t o drive t h e t r i p l e RPM
indicator 7EN i,nst'alled i n the instrurnent panel 2VE and i s fed t o t h e RPM
warning unit 1EW. For removal and i n s t a l l a t i o n of t h e engine tacho-generator
r e f e r t o chapter 61 and f o r main transmission t o chapter 11.

B0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 118
MBB HELICOPTERS
MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB B0 105-
92 - 53 RPM warning N 1 and NR ( r o t o r RPM)
(see f i g u r e 92-41)

R P M warning i s c o n t r o l l e d by t h e RPM warning u n i t 3EW i n s t a l l e d on t h e in-


strument panel 2VE.
The AC voltage produced by t h e tacho-generators i s f e d i n t o t h e RPM warning
u n i t 1EW. The RPM warning s i g n a l i s released i f t h e r e is an N I RPM d i f f e r e n c e
between t h e engines. An i n t e r m i t t e n t warning sound (600 Hz) i s audible i n t h e
headset and t h e warning l i g h t 'RPMn f l a s h e s .

1. N 1 R P M warning

The RPM warning (sound and f l a s h e s ) i s generated i f t h e N 1 RPM d i f f e r e n c e


between t h e engines i s g r e a t e r than 12% I O.8%, i n t h e range from i d l e t o
f u l l power.
The warning can be reset using push-button switch RPM 2EW on t h e p i l o t r s
(copilot's) cyclic stick.
2. NR RPM warning

a. Rotor underspeed
The RPM warning i s released i f t h e r o t o r RPM i s between 75% I0.8%
and 95% I 0.8%. An i n t e r m i t t e n t warning sound i s audible i n t h e
headset and t h e warning l i g h t "RPM" f l a s h e s .
b. Rotor overspeed
The RPM warning i s released i f t h e r o t o r RPM exceeds 103% I 0.8%.
I n t h i s case only t h e warning l i g h t "RPMn 3EW f l a s h e s (S/N 7 -
160).

EFFECTIVITY . o S/N 161 and subsequent


I f t h e r o t o r RPM exceeds 103% I O.8%, t h e
warning l i g h t "RPM" f l a s h e s . I f t h e r o t o r RPM
exceeds 108% I 0.8%, a continuous warning tone
i s audible.

B0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 119
EUROCOPTER MAINTENANCE MANUAL B 0 105

MAlN BUS

HEAD SET

WARNING SOUND
1A

TRIPLE ref. to Radimav.


INDICATOR System

r-------1
I I
MAIN TRANSMISSION
INSTRUMENT PANEL 2VE
TACHOGENERAT. -t I
3EN

NI-INDICATOR I I I I

-
ENGINE N I

1 TACHOGENERAT.
102EN 1202EN
RPM-WARNING UNIT
1EW

ENGINE N2
TRIPLE

.
INDICATOR
I I WARNING LIGHTBEN I
I I

I
II PUSH2EW
BUTTON CYCLlC
STICK I
I I

Figure 92-41 -
RPM monitoring engine and rotor

CHAPTER 92 Revision 19
Page 120
MBB HELICOPTERS
MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB - B0 105
92 - 54 N2 overspeed warning (see f i g u r e 92-42)

A tacho-generator (ENG.1 101EN, ENG.11 201EN) i s i n s t a l l e d on t h e l e f t side


( i n f l i g h t direction, forward) of each engine gearbox ( r e f e r t o figure 92-40)
and generates a l t e r n a t i n g current, t h e frequency of which varies i n
proportion t o the power turbine speed (N2).
The AC voltage drives a synchronous motor i n s i d e t h e t r i p l e RPM indicator
7EN, causing a display of N2 speed i n per cent v i a pointer 1 (ENG.1) and 2
(ENG.11) . (Refer t o chapter 91) .
One hundred percent corresponds t o t h e nominal power output of t h e power
turbine .

TRlPLE N2 RPM INDICATOR 7EN


n

I
L---------

TACHO-GENERATOR 101EN (201EN) .

Figure 92-42 N2 overspeed warning

a. Removal

- Disconnect t h e e l e c t r i c a l connector from t h e tacho-generator and


protect w i t h a cap.
- Remove the four self-locking nuts (nylstop) w i t h washers. Detach
tacho-generator and protect opening on engine gearbox with a cap.
b. Installation
- Lightly grease drive pinion w i t h item 101.

- Installation i s essentially t h e reverse of t h e removal.

B0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 121
MBB HELICOPTERS
-
'

MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB B0 105

92 - 55 Troubleshooting - RPM monitoring, engines and r o t o r

NO. TROUBLE SYMPTOM PROBABLE CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION

RPM-Indicators N I , N2 and NR
See Chapter 91;
RPM warning - N1
A t an R P M d i f f e r e n t i a l
of 12%:

1 - warning l i g h t RPM Wiring between RPM Check wiring and connec-


does not f l a s h , warning u n i t 3EW t o r c o n t a c t s f o r continu-
intermittent and warning l i g h t i t y and good e l e c t r i c a l
warning sound i s defective contact .
audible Repair o r r e p l a c e
d e f e c t i v e components
a s necessary.
2 - warning l i g h t RPM RPM warning u n i t Replace RPM warning u n i t
does not f l a s h , 3EW d e f e c t i v e
i n t e n n i t t e n t sound
i s not audible

3 - warning cannot be Push button RPM WARN . Test push button and
reset 2EW on p i l o t ' s (CO- r e p l a c e i f necessary.
p i l o t s) c y c l i c s t i c k
grip defective

RPM warning u n i t Replace RPM warning u n i t .


3EW d e f e c t i v e
RPM warning - NR
A t a r o t o r speed
between 75% and 95%:
1 - warning l i g h t RPM Wiring between RPM Check wiring and connec-
does not f l a s h , warning u n i t 3EW and t o r c o n t a c t s f o r continu-
i n t e n n i t t e n t sound warning l i g h t i t y and good e l e c t r i c a l
i s audible def e c t i v e contact .
Repair o r r e p l a c e
d e f e c t i v e components
a s necessary.
' 2 - warning l i g h t does RPM warning u n i t Replace RPM warning u n i t .
not f l a s h , i n t e r - 3EW def e c t i v e
m i t t e n t sound i s
not audible

Table 92-10 Troubleshooting (1 of 2 )

B0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 122
MBB HELICOPTERS
-
'

MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB B0 105

Troubleshooting (continued)

NO. TROUBLE SYMPTOM PROBABLE CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION

3 RPM warning l i g h t Same as item 1 and 2


does not flash a t a
rotor RPM of 102%

4 Continuous warning Headset defective Check headset and replace,


sound not audible i f necessary.
a t a rotor RPM of
108%
Engine N2 RPM monitorinq
No RPM indication Loose receptacle Replace tacho-generator.
or pointer 1 or 2 p l a t e on tacho-
indication i s erra- generator l O l E N
t i c or sluggish. (201EN) .
Defective tacho- Measure output v o l t age .
generator l O l E N 100%rotor RPM, 21 - t5VAC
(201EN) . (70.0 Hz)

Intermittent con- Check e l e c t r i c a l connection


t a c t a t plugs f o r good e l e c t r i c a l contact.
10IENar 2VEd, Repair or replace defective
111Wa, 7ENar component s .
(102ENar 2VEdr
211War 7ENa).
Defective t r i p l e Check t r i p l e RPM indi-
RPM indicator 7EN. cator by temporarily re-
placing it w i t h new indi-
cator .

Table 92-10 Troubleshooting (2 of 2)

B 0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 123
MBB HELICOPTERS
MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB B 0 105 -
92 - 56 Functional t e s t - RPM monitoring, engines and r o t o r

1. General

The applicable p o r t i o n of t h i s f u n c t i o n a l t e s t must be c a r r i e d out a f t e r


each replacement of one o r more e l e c t r i c a l components, cables, e l e c t r i c a l
connections, e t c . of a RPM monitoring system.

NOTE The f u n c t i o n a l t e s t of RPM i n d i c a t o r s i s described i n


paragraph 91.

2. Functional t e s t - RPM monitoring N 1 and N2


a. With engines o f f
- Indication
- P o i n t e r s on RPM i n d i c a t o r 108EN and 208EN must read 0 f 0.5.

b. With engines running a t 100% N2 RPM


- Indication
- P o i n t e r s on RPM i n d i c a t o r 108EN and 208EN must read 86%.

- Warning
CAUTION WHEN ACTUATING THE FOUR-WAY SWITCH, MAKE
.SURE COLLECTIVE PITCH STICK REMAINS I N ITS
LOCKED POSITION.

- Move four-way switch 8KA i n p o s i t i o n L+.


N 1 RPM of ENG. I must increase; N 1 RPM of ENG. I1 must decrease.

EFFECTIVITY o When trim a c t u a t o r c i r c u i t r y i s modified


( r e f e r t o f i g u r e 92-51).
o Move four-way switch i n p o s i t i o n L+.
N 1 RPM of ENG. I must increase; N 1 RPM of
ENG. I1 remains unchanged.

- At a N I RPM d i f f e r e n t i a l exceeding 12% f 1, a c o u s t i c and o p t i c a l


warning s h a l l come on (continuous warning sound i n headset and .
f l a s h i n g i n d i c a t i o n on warning l i g h t 3EW " R P M n ) .

NOTE Make s u r e N2 RPM does not decrease.

- Perform Same work s t e p s f o r ENG. I1 ( p o s i t i o n R t ) .

B 0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 124
MBB HELICOPTERS
MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB - B0 105

3. Functional test - RPM monitoring r o t o r


a. With engines o f f

- Indication
- P o i n t e r 1 and 2 of t h e t r i p l e RPM i n d i c a t o r 7EN must read 0 f 1.

b. With engines running (power l e v e r i n p o s i t i o n "FLIGHTn)


- Indication
- ~ o i n t e r1 and 2 of t h e t r i p l e RPM i n d i c a t o r must read 100%.

C. Warning

NOTE I f RPM warning u n i t P/N KDWO2-1 i s i n s t a l l e d , Y


warning l i g h t "RPMn may b r i e f l y i l l u m i n a t e s once
o r s e v e r a l times when e l e c t r i c a l power i s switched
On.
- Low RPM warning
Slowly reduce r o t o r R P from ~ 100%. Within a r o t o r RPM range of
95% f 0.8% t o 75% f 3%, t h e warning l i g h t 3EW s h a l l i l l u m i n a t e .
with a f l a s h i n g i n d i c a t i o n and i n t e r m i t t e n t audio tone warning
Signals s h a l l be p r e s e n t i n headsets. (Refer t o chapter 105 and
FLM. )

- Rotor overspeed warning (can be t e s t e d i n f l i g h t o n l y ) . (Refer t o


chapter 105 and FLM.)

EFFECTIVITY o For h e l i c o p t e r s up t o and including S/N 160,


t h e warning l i g h t 3EW s h a l l f l a s h a t a r o t o r
speed of 103% t 0.8%.

o For h e l i c o p t e r S/N 161 and subsequent, t h e


warning l i g h t 3EW s h a l l f l a s h a t a r o t o r speed
of 103% f 0.8% and an a d d i t i o n a l continuous
set a t a r o t o r speed of = 108% + 0.8%.

B0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 125
MBB HELICOPTERS
MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB - B 0 105
92 - 57 Chip detector system (see figure 92-40 t o 92-43)

1. Engines

Magnetic chip detectors 101EV, 102EV, (ENG. I ) and 201EV, 202EV (ENG. 11)
i n s t a l l e d i n the engine gearbox, a t t r a c t metallic p a r t i c l e s (chip
particles, gear debris and fragments e t c . ) from engine lubricating o i l
by a detector magnet. When the contact gap on t h e detector magnet i s
bridged by accumulated metallic p a r t i c l e s , an e l e c t r i c a l ground i s pro-
vided t o complete t h e warning l i g h t 3EV c i r c u i t and warning l i g h t 3EV
"MAG. PLUG l n and/or "MAG. PLUG 2" illuminates, indicating excessive
metallic p a r t i c l e accumulation i n the o i l .

MAIN BUS
101 EV. 102 EV
ENG. I
CHIP

MAG. PLUG 1
DETECTOR
'
I1
FUSE 10E
MAG. PLUG 1 WARNING LIGHT
3 EV
' MAG. PLUG 2
I 201 EV. 202 EV
900201 ENG. I1
MAG. PLUG 2

DETECTOR

Figure 92-43 Chip Detector System - engines


For removal and i n s t a l l a t i o n of t h e chip detector r e f e r t o Allison
Operation and Maintenance Manual.
Main transmission
The chip detector 5EV (see figure 92-44) i n s t a l l e d i n the o i l drain
opening of the main transmission a t t r a c t s metal p a r t i c l e s from the
transmission o i l by a detector magnet.
The metal p a r t i c l e s accumulated (chip p a r t i c l e s , gear debris, fragments
e t c . ) bridge the contact gap on t h e detector magnet and complete t h e
e l e c t r i c c i r c u i t of the warning l i g h t 4EV t o ground.
The warning l i g h t 4EV "T PLUGn on the instrument panel 2VE illuminates,
indicating metal accumulation i n the transmission o i l .

B 0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 126
MBB HELICOPTERS
-
'

MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB B0 105

MAlN BUS

WARNING LIGHT
b I
OIL COOL 10 ED

T PLUG 4 EV
900080 h

I CHIP
DET ECTOR .
5, EV

Figure 92-44 Chip Detector System, Main transmission

For removal and installation of the chip detector 5EV refer to chapter 11
main transmission.

92 - 58 Oil pressure monitoring (see figures 92-46 and 92-47)

1. Oil pressure monitoring - engines (see figure 92-45)


The oil pressure transmitter lOlED (ENG. I) and 201ED (ENG. 11) is lo-
cated in the oil pressure line on lower left or right side in the engine
compartment (refer to figures 203 and 204). The transmitter comprises a
pressure controlled potentiometer, whose resistance varies relative to
the oil pressure changes, causing rotational movement of the annature in
the Cross coil of the triple oil pressure indicator 4ED, and provides
pressure readings in bar (kp/cm2) .

B0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 127
MBB HELICOPTERS
MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB - B0 105

MAlN BUS

FUSE 5E
OIL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER
101 ED (201 ED)

OIL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER 4 ED L,

Figure 92-45 O i l Pressure Indication

a. Removal

- Remove lockwire, disconnect e l e c t r i c a l connector from transmitter


and protect with cap.
- Unscrew o i l pressure transmitter and cap the opening with a sealing
plug
b. Installation
Installation i s e s s e n t i a l l y the reverse of the removal.

B0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 128
MBB HELICOPTERS
-
MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB B0 105

1 Oil pressure transmitter lOlED .


2 Oil temperature transmitter 102ED

Figure 92-46 Location of Components

B0 105
CKAPTER 92
Page 129
MBB HELICOPTERS
-
'

MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB B0 105

1 Oil pressure transmitter 201ED


2 Oil temperature transmitter 202ED

Figure 92-47 Location of Components

B0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 130
MBB HELICOPTERS
-
'

MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB B0 105

2. Oil pressure monitoring - main transmission (see figures 92-48 and 92-49)
The oil pressure warning system includes the oil pressure switch 22EW and
oll pressure transmitter 301ED at the same installation locations as
described above.
In case of reduction or loss of pressure below 0.5 bar the contact of the
oil pressure switch 22EW closes the electric circuit to the warning light
"T OILn 3EW, which illuminates.

MAlN BUS OIL PRESSURE SWITCH


22 EW
PP21 28V-
P
See Fig. 92-50

I
I

-
WARNING LIGHT 3 EW

see Fig. 92-50

I A 3
I FUSE 26 EW

OIL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER


I 301 ED
INDICATOR 4ED
-
-
-
I

EFFECTIVITY up to and including S/N 160 and Series D


S/N 161 and subsequent

Figure 92-48 Oil Pressure Warning System - main transmission


a. Removal of oil pressure transmitter 301ED
- Remove lockwire, disconnect electrical connector from transmitter
and protect with cap.
- Unscrew oil pressure transmitter and cap the opening with a sealing
plug.
b. Installation
Installation is essentially the reverse of the removal.
C. Removal and installation of push-button switch 22EW
Removal and installation is identical to oil pressure transmitter
301ED.

B0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 131
MBB HELICOPTERS
-
MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB B0 105

1 Oil temperature transmitter 302ED up to and including S/N 160


2 Oil temperature switch 21EW
3 Oil temperature transmitter 302ED S/N 161 and subsequent
4 Oil pressure switch 22EW
5 Oil pressure transmitter 301ED
6 RPM Tachometer-generator 3EN
7 Differential pressure switch llED
8 Chip detector 5EV following implementation of
SB 80-41

Figure 92-49 Main transmission


B0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 132
MAINTENANCE MANUAL B 0 105

92 - 59 Temperature monitoring (see figure 92-50)


1. Oil temperature monitoring - engines and main transmission
The oil temperature switch 21EW is installed on the transmission housing
below the oil cooler fan assembly (see figures 92-49 and 92-50).
If the oil temperature rises above 1 0 5 OC, the switch closes and the *
"OIL COOLn warning light 3EW Comes On. *

WARNING LIGHT 3EW


MAlN BUS TEMPERATURE SWlTCH
21 EW

BREAKER 1

sec Fig. 92-48

Effectlvlty Up to S/N 160 and Serles D

b
II Effectlvlty S/N l6l and Subsequent

OIL TEMPERATURE OIL TEMPERATURE


900077 INDICATOR 5 ED TRANSMITTER 302 ED

Figure 92-50 Oil Temperature Warning System - Schematic Diagram


Removal and installation of the oil temperature switch is described in
chapter 11.

2. Turbine outlet temperature monitoring


Refer to chapter 91.

B0 1 0 5
CfiAPTER 92
Revision 1 6 Page 1 3 3
EUROCOPTER MAINTENANCE MANUAL B0 105

92 - 60 N 2 G o V e r n o r (see f i g u r e 92-51)

The N2 governor c o n s i s t s of:


- a c t u a t o r 103KA f o r engine 1 and 203KA f o r engine 2
- four-way switch 8KA
( i f a dual control system i s i n s t a l l e d , a second four-way switch i s pro-
vided f o r t h e c o p i l o t )
- two changeover relays 4KA and. 5KA
- an interlock relay 6KA (connected only i f a dual c o n t r o l system i s
installed)
- diode p l a t e lOKA
1. General

The N2 governor controls output RPM of t h e engines i n r e l a t i o n t o load


requirements of t h e helicopter.
I n order t o maintain a constant N2 RPM, t h e N2 f u e l governor controls t h e
f u e l flow metering i n t h e N1 gas producer f u e l control system.

B0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 134
'MBB HELICOPTERS
-
'

MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB B 0 105

By a c t u a t i n g t h e four-way switch 8KA, t o r q u e balance between engines and


change i n t h e N2 RPM and Rotor RPM r e s p e c t i v e l y can be achieved.
The mechanical comporients of t h i s system and t h e r i g g i n g of t h e N 1 and N2
c o n t r o l linkage a r e described i n chapter 62.
a. Operation

Via a mechanical linkage between c o l l e c t i v e p i t c h l e v e r and N2


governor t h e N2 governor c o n t r o l l e v e r s ( r e f e r t o chapter 4 1 ) a r e
moved towards "INCRn (max.) when c o l l e c t i v e blade p i t c h angle i s
increased (causing added f u e l flow from t h e N I f u e l c o n t r o l ) . This
prevents a drop i n output RPM of t h e engines and t h u s a drop i n main
r o t o r RPM.
Each governor l e v e r i s equipped with a trim a c t u a t o r (103KA, ENG. I
and 203KAr ENG. 11) b u i l t i n t o t h e mechanical linkage, which allows
a d d i t i o n a l adjustment v i a four-way switch l o c a t e d on t h e c o l l e c t i v e
s t i c k g r i p 5/6VE.
By a c t u a t i n g t h e four-way switch 8KA, t h e following power s e t t i n g s
can be achieved:

Switching p o s i t i o n Function

INCR = Increase i n power of both engines


DECR Decrease i n power of both engines
L + = Increase i n power of l e f t engine, decrease i n
power of r i g h t engine
R + = Increase i n power of r i g h t engine, decrease i n
power of l e f t engine

NOTE With trim a c t u a t o r c i r c u i t r y modified ( r e f e r t o WDM) .


L + = Increase i n power of l e f t engine, and r i g h t engine
unchanged.
R + = Increase i n power of r i g h t engine, and l e f t engine
unchanged.

With c i r c u i t breaker 1KA pushed, and depending upon t h e p o s i t i o n of


t h e four-way switch, r e l a y s 5KA and 6KA l o c a t e d i n t h e r e l a y box l O V E
a r e energized, and switch t o clockwise o r counter clockwise r o t a t i o n
of t h e a c t u a t o r motors 103KA and 203KA. Extension o r r e t r a c t i o n
motion of t h e a c t u a t o r s h a f t i s t r a n s m i t t e d t o t h e N2 governor l e v e r ,
thereby c o n t r o l l i n g t h e f u e l flow metering i n t h e N 1 f u e l c o n t r o l .
When a dual c o l l e c t i v e p i t c h c o n t r o l i s i n s t a l l e d , t h e " P i l o t n
four-way switch has p r i o r i t y , which when actuated, energizes t h e
r e l a y 6KAr thereby disconnecting v o l t a g e supply t o t h e "Copilotn
f our-way switch.

B 0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 135
MBB HELICOPTERS
MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB -
B0 105

1
I
< I
Y I
CO I
I
e II
5
V) I
> I
<
s II
ri I
2
21 I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
U
Y I
OD I
I I
e I
5
V) I
>- I
<
s I
K I
3 I
I
E RELAY
L BOX 10 KA
„----,--„„„, J
-„----- -
900196

NOTE When trim actuator c i r c u i t r y i s modified


(modified printed c i r c u i t board) r e f e r t o WDM.

Figure 92-51 N2 Control

B0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 136
MBB HELICOPTERS
MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB B0 105-
2. Actuators 103KA and 203KA (See figure 92-52)
The two a c t u a t o r s 103KA and 203KA a r e i n s t a l l e d i n t h e N2 control system
of t h e engines.
They are DC a c t u a t o r s which can be operated a s LH and RH drive. Two
Ncroswitches disconnect power supply a s soon a s t h e i r end'position i s
reached.
The extension and r e t r a c t i o n speed i s approximately lmm/s.

NOTE Refer t o chapter 61 f o r adjustment, maintenance/inspection,


removal and i n s t a l l a t i o n .

3. Relays 4KA t o 5KA (see f i g u r e 92-8)


Relays 4KA t o 5KA a r e plugged i n relay box lOVE (See f i g u r e 92-1 t o
92-3). Relay box lOVE i s mounted t o t h e f l o o r s h e l l .

NOTE For work on r e l a y box l O V E , t h e f l o o r s h e l l must be


opened and r e l a y box must be removed i f necessary.

4. Four-way switch 8KA (See f i g u r e 92-73)


Four-way switch BKA c o n s i s t s of four microswitches and i s i n s t a l l e d i n
t h e c o l l e c t i v e s t i c k g r i p 5/6VE.

NOTE Maintenance/inspection a s well a s removal and i n s t a l l a t i o n


procedures a r e described i n paragraph 92-95.
5. Printed c i r c u i t board l O K A
The printed c i r c u i t board l O K A i s i n s t a l l e d i n relay box lOVE (see
figure 92-1 t o 92-3).

B0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 137
MBB HELICOPTEKS
MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB - B0 105

E l e c t r i c a l connector
Bonding s t r i p
Self-locking nut
S p l i t pin
Bellcrank
Trim actuator
Screw
Rod end

Figure 92-52 Actuator N2 Control

B0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 138
MBB HELICOPTERS
MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB - B0 105
92 - 61 Troubleshooting - N2 Governor
1. General

Ensure t h a t c i r c u i t s t o be troubleshooted a r e supplied with power.


P r i o r t o changing a System component, check wiring f o r continuity, insu-
l a t i o n f a u l t s and loose connection. Subsequently, check i f e l e c t r i c a l
connectors a r e properly connected t o t h e u n i t s . The r e s p e c t i v e wiring
diagrams a r e contained i n t h e Wiring Diagram Manual.

CAUTION WHEN WORKING ON LIVE COMPONENTS -


DANGER OF SHORT CIRCUITS!

2. Troubleshooting - N2 Governor
NO. TROUBLE SYMPTOM PROBABLE CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION

1 No engine trirrrming Break i n wiring, o r Check wiring f o r c o n t i n u i t y


' p o s s i b l e , i . e . no defective e l e c t r i c a l using t h e applicable wiring.
extension o r re- connection lOVEa o r diagram. Check e l e c t r i c a l
t r a c t i o n motion 6VEa. connection f o r good e l e c t r i -
of trim a c t u a t o r c a l c o n t a c t . Repair o r re-
103KA and 203KA, p l a c e d e f e c t i v e components.
although f our-way
switch 8KA i s Defective p r i n t e d Check f o r c o n t i n u i t y accor-
c o r r e c t l y actuated. c i r c u i t board l O K A ding t o applicable wiring
i n r e l a y box 10VE. diagram. Replace d e f e c t i v e
diodes, o r p r i n t e d c i r c u i t
board.

2 Left a c t u a t o r 103KA Defective p r i n t e d Same a s above.


i s inoperative, o r c i r c u i t board l O K A
moves i n one direc- i n r e l a y box 10VE.
t i o n only .
Defective switching Check f o r c o n t i n u i t y using
r e l a y 4KA i n r e l a y t h e a p p l i c a b l e wiring dia-
box 10VE. gram. Replace d e f e c t i v e
relay .
Defective a c t u a t o r Replace a c t u a t o r .
103KA.

Table 92-11 Troubleshooting - N2 Governor (1 of 2)

B 0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 139
MBB HELICOPTERS
MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB B0 105 -
TROUBLESHOOTING (continued)

NO. TROUBLE SYMPTOM PROBABLE CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION

3 Right actuator 203KA Defective printed Check f o r continuity using


i s inoperative or c i r c u i t board l O K A t h e applicable wiring dia-
moves i n one direc- i n relay box 10VE. gram. Replace defective
t i o n only . diode, or printed c i r c u i t
board.

Defective switching Check f o r continuity accor-


relay 5KA i n relay ding t o applicable wiring
box 10VE. diagram. Replace defective
relay .
Defective actuator Check actuator by temporarily
203KA. replacing with new actuator.
Replace def ective actuator .
4 Switching position: R t Same corrective action a s
described f o r defective
Left actuator 103KA printed c i r c u i t board or
extends, but right switching relay.
actuator 203KA does
not r e t r a c t accor-
ding t o actuator
circuitry (refer t o
WDM) . The Same happens
i n switching position L+.
5 P r i o r i t y four-way Defective relay 6KA. Check f o r continuity accor-
switch 8KA "Pilotn ding t o applicable wiring
(6VE) f a i l s . diagram. Replace relay.

Table 92-11 Troubleshooting - N2 Governor (2 of 2)

B0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 1 4 0
MBB HELICOPTERS
MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB B0 105 -
92 - 62 Functional test - N2 governor
1. T r i m a c t u a t o r 103KA (203KA)

a. Engage and switch on e x t e r n a l power and p r e s s c i r c u i t ' b r e a k e r 1KA.


b. Four-way switch i n p o s i t i o n INCR:
- both governor c o n t r o l l e v e r s move t o "maxn, i . e . t h e N2 t r i m
actuators retract .

C. Four-way switch i n p o s i t i o n DECR:


- both governor c o n t r o l l e v e r s move t o "minnt i . e . t h e N2 trim ac-
t u a t o r s extend.
d. Four-way switch i n p o s i t i o n L+:
- governor c o n t r o l l e v e r on l e f t engine moves t o "maxn, governor
c o n t r o l l e v e r on r i g h t engine moves t o "minnt i.e. t r i m a c t u a t o r
( l e f t engine) r e t r a c t s , trim a c t u a t o r ( r i g h t engine) extends.
e. Four-way switch i n p o s i t i o n R t :
- governor c o n t r o l l e v e r on r i g h t engine moves t o "maxn and governor
c o n t r o l l e v e r on l e f t engine moves t o "minn; i . e . trim a c t u a t o r
( r i g h t engine) r e t r a c t s and trim a c t u a t o r ( l e f t engine) extends.

NOTE When trim a c t u a t o r c i r c u i t r y i s modified ( r e f e r t o WDM).

f. Four-way switch i n p o s i t i o n L+:

- governor c o n t r o l l e v e r on l e f t engine moves t o "maxn, governor


c o n t r o l l e v e r on r i g h t engine remains unchanged; i . e . t r i m a c t u a t o r
( r i g h t engine) r e t r a c t s and t r i m a c t u a t o r ( l e f t engine) remains un-
changed.

g. Four-way switch i n p o s i t i o n R t :
- governor c o n t r o l l e v e r on r i g h t engine moves t o "maxn, governor
c o n t r o l l e v e r on l e f t engine remains unchanged; i . e . trim a c t u a t o r
( r i g h t engine) r e t r a c t s and trim a c t u a t o r ( l e f t engine) remains un-
changed .

NOTE Trim a c t u a t o r s must have an extend t r a v e l of approx.


30 mm and must automatically switch o f f i n both t r a v e l
end p o s i t i o n s .

B0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 1 4 1
MBB HELICOPTERS'
MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB - B0 105
2. P r i o r i t y c i r c u i t of four-way switch 8KA "PILOTn when dual c o l l e c t i v e
p i t c h c o n t r o l system i s i n s t a l l e d .

a. Move four-way switch 8KA wCOPILOTwt o a l l four p o s i t i o n s ( r e f e r t o


s t e p 1 . ) . T r i m a c t u a t o r s must extend and r e t r a c t according t o t h e
s e l e c t e d switch p o s i t i o n .
b. Simultaneously move four-way switch "PILOTn t o opposite switch
positions; trim a c t u a t o r motor must change i t s r o t a t i o n a l
direction.
C. Switching off i s made by l i m i t switches i n s t a l l e d i n trim a c t u a t o r s .
d. Pul1 c i r c u i t breaker 1 K A and switch o f f e x t e r n a l power.

92-63 E n g i n e a n t i - i c i n g s y s t e m
( s e e f i g u r e s 92-53 and 92-54)

The engine a n t i - i c i n g system c o n s i s t s of


- one a n t i - i c i n g valve each f o r engine 1 and 2
- one a c t u a t o r (21VE) each f o r engine 1 and 2
. - two r e l a y s 5HL (6HL), two t o g g l e switches 2HL (12HL) and i n d i c a t o r
l i g h t 9HL
1. General

When t h e ambient temperature f a l l s below +4OC, t h e engine a n t i - i c i n g


system must be switched on t o p r o t e c t t h e engine compressor a i r i n l e t
from i c i n g .
2. Function
The a n t i - i c i n g systern i s supplied with e l e c t r i c a l power from c i r c u i t
breakers lHL, l l H L "ENG. ANTI-ICING 1-2" and i s switched on with t o g g l e
switches 2HL, 12HL 'ENG. ANTI-ICING 1-2". The i n d i c a t o r l i g h t 9HL with
legend panels

EFFECTIVITY o S/N 7 -
160: wLn and "Rn
o S/N 161 and subsequent: "ANTI-ICING 1 and 2"

f o r t h e LH and RH engine, i n d i c a t e s operation of t h e a n t i - i c i n g system.


The c i r c u i t with r e l a y s 5HL, 6HL ensures t h a t i n d i c a t o r l i g h t 9HL remains
lit during t h e c l o s i n g operation of t h e a n t i - i c i n g valve. Actuators a r e
automatically switched o f f by l i m i t switches "ANTI-ICING ON OFFw when -
a n t i - i c i n g valve has reached i t s r e s p e c t i v e end p o s i t i o n .

B0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 142
MBB HELICOPTERS
MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB - B0 1 0 5

F i g u r e 92-53 Engine Anti-Icing System

B0 1 0 5
CHAPTER 92
Page 1431144
'MBB HELICOPTERS
MAINTENANCE MANüAL MBB - B0 105
Compressor discharge a i r (approx. 250 O C ) i s routed f r o n t h e compressor
d i f f u s e r (see figure 92-54) s c r o l l through an actuator operated a n t i -
i c i n g valve located on t h e f r o n t face of t h e d i f f u s e r s c r o l l and
associated anti-icing tubing t o t h e compressor f r o n t support. Therefore
i c i n g of t h e engine a i r i n l e t i s prevented.
l i t h toggle switch 2HL (12HL) s e t i n t h e non-operating position, actuator
i s supplied w i t h e l e c t r i c a l power fron 1 s t switch "ANTI-ICING OFF",
w i t h reversed p o l a r i t y . Actuator extends and closes t h e anti-icing valve.
During the closing operation of t h e valve, r e l a y 5HL (6HL) remains
energized through l i m i t switch "ANTI-ICING OFFnand relay contact closes
t h e c i r c u i t t o t h e indicator l i g h t 9HL, which therefore remains lit
during t h e valve closing operation.
When the actuator i s switched off i n i t s extend stop position by linit
switch "ANTI-ICING OFFn, r e l a y 5HL (6HL) w i l l de-energize and t h e
indicator l i g h t 9HL w i l l extinguish.

NOTE Maintenance/inspection a s well a s removal and i n s t a l l a t i o n


procedures a r e described i n chapter 61.

Anti-icing tubes
Anti-icing valve
Act uat or
Diffusor s c r o l l
Compressor f r o n t
support
Front support
radial struts
Compressor i n l e t
cone
Figure 92-54 Engine Anti-Icing System

B 0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 145
MBB HELICOPTERS
MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB B0 105 -
92 - 64 Troubleshooting - engine anti-icing system

NO. TROUBLE SYMPTOM PROBABLE CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION

1 Actuator does not Defective actuator . Replace actuator .


r e t r a c t or extend.
Defective c i r c u i t Replace c i r c u i t breakers.
breakers l H L I 11HL.
Defective toggle Replace toggle switches.
switches 2HL, 12HL.
Defective wiring. Check wiring f o r continuity
using the applicable wiring
diagram ( r e f e r t o WDM) ; re-
place defective wiring.
2 Indicator l i g h t 9HL
f a i l s t o illuminate
a) during operation Bulbs def ective . Replace bulbs.
of the anti-icing
systm Diodes 25WW, 27WW Check diodes and replace, i f
defective. necessary.
Wiring defective. Check wiring f o r continuity
using the applicable wiring
diagram ( r e f e r t o WDM) ; re-
place defective wiring.
b) during the closing Relays 5HL, 6HL Replace relays.
operation of the defective.
anti-icing valve,
only . Diodes 7HL, 8HL Check diodes and replace, i f
defective. necessary.

Table 92-12 Troubleshooting engine anti-icing system

92 - 65 Functional t e s t - engine anti-icing system

1. General

This functional t e s t must be carried out a f t e r having changed one or more


e l e c t r i c a l components, cables, e l e c t r i c a l connections, e t c . of the engine
anti-icing system.

B0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 1 4 6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL BO 105

2. Preparations

-- engines must be shut down

-- connect and switch on external power supply unit

-- set BATTERY MASTER switch to EPU ON

3. Performance of test

NOTE The test is performed with the engines shut down and is identical for both actuators, LH
and RH.

a. Depress circuit breaker ”ENGINE ANTI--ICING 1--2” 1HL (11HL) and set toggle switch ”ENGINE ANTI--
ICING 1--2” 2HL (12HL) in the ”ON” position.

-- The actuator retracts and opens the anti--icing valve.

-- In the retract stop position, actuator is switched off by the limit switch and the indicator light 9HL
illuminates.

b. Set toggle switch ”ENGINE ANTI--ICING 1--2” 2HL (12HL) in the ”OFF” position.

-- The actuator extends and closes the anti--icing valve.

NOTE Indicator light 9HL remains lit during the closing operation of the anti--icing valve.

-- In the extend stop position, actuator is switched off by the limit switch and the indicator light 9HL
extinguishes.

92 -- 66 Engine fire detection system (see figures 92--55 to 92--57)


The engine fire detection system consists of

-- heat sensitive fire detectors 101WG, 102WG for engine 1 and 201WG, 202WG for engine 2

-- control unit 24VE

-- warning lights 104WG and 204WG

-- test switches 103WG and 203WG

1. General
The engine fire detection system monitors potential fire zones of the engine compartments and provides
a visual warning via 2 warning lights labelled F on the instrument panel 2VE in the event of fire or overheat
conditions.

CHAPTER 92
Page 147
MAINTENANCE MANUAL BO 105

2. Description

EFFECTIVITY S/N 7 -- 160


Two heat--sensitive fire detectors 101WG, 102WG and 201WG, 202WG respectively are mounted on each
engine (see figure 92--56).
When the ambient temperature increases in the engine compartments, the detectors open and thus ener-
gize the warning lights 104WG, 204WG through relays in the control unit 24VE installed in the lower portion
of the instrument panel 2VE. To ensure a flicker--free indication, a RC--unit is connected in parallel to the
relay coils causing a delay in relay energizing and de--energizing.
The engine fire detection system is supplied with electrical power via circuit breaker 1WB and 2WB ”FIRE
WARNING I--II” from the main bus PP21 or, if installed, from the emergency bus PP20.
Functional testing of the system is made by push--to--test switch ”TEST FIRE” 103WG, 203WG. Lamp test-
ing of warning lights is by depressing the warning lights 104WG, 204WG.

EFFECTIVITY S/N 161 and subsequent


The circuit breakers 1WB, 2WB ”FIRE WARNING I--II” are replaced by fuses 1WG, 2WG. The respective
control unit is identified 6WG. The fuses 1WG and 2WG could be replaced by circuit breakers (see SB
BO105--90--102).

CHAPTER 92 Revision 26
Page 148
MAINTENANCE MANUAL BO 105

3
2

2
BO105_WAH_1487_R

1
2

1 Instrument Panel 2VE 2 Engines


Push--to--test switches (103WG, 203WG) Fire detectors
Fire warning lights (104WG, 204WG) 101WG, 102WG (LH)
201WG, 202WG (RH)
EFFECTIVITY S/N 7 -- 160
3 Electrical connections (111VV, 211VV)
Circuit breakers (1WB, 2WB)
Control unit (24VE)

EFFECTIVITY S/N 161 and subsequent

Fuses / circuit breakers (1WG, 2WG)


Control unit (6WG)

Figure 92--55 Engine Fire Detection System

Revision 26 CHAPTER 92
Page 149
MAINTENANCE MANUAL BO 105

When the fire detectors 101WG/201WG and 201WG/202WG are closed, both relays in the control unit
24VE are energized and the circuits 104WG/204WG warning light open.
Should one of the two detectors an either the left or right engine open due to excessive ambient tempera-
ture, the respective relay in the control unit is de--energized and the associated warning light circuit com-
pleted. The same effect is obtained by operating the push--to--test switches 103WG/203WG, which simu-
late an opening of the fire detectors.
BO105_WAH_1588_R

Figure 92--56 Engine Fire Warning System

CHAPTER 92 Revision 26
Page 150
MAINTENANCE MANUAL BO 105

92 -- 67 Troubleshooting -- engine fire detection system

NO. TROUBLE SYMPTOM PROBABLE CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION


1. Fire warning lights 104WG, Defective lamps. Perform an internal lamp test
204WG do not illuminate when and replace defective lamps, as
pressing the push--to--test necessary.
switches 103WG, 203WG.
Defective circuit breaker or Replace defective circuit
fuse. breaker or fuse.
Defective wiring. Check wiring for continuity us-
ing the applicable wiring dia-
gram (refer to WDM). Replace
defective wiring, as necessary.
2. Warning light indication at nor- Defective relay in the control Check control unit and replace,
mal temperature in engine unit. if required.
compartments.
Defective fire detector. Check fire detector and replace,
if required.
Defective push--to--test switch. Check push--to--test switch and
replace, if required.
Defective wiring. Check wiring for continuity us-
ing the applicable wiring dia-
gram (refer to WDM). Replace
defective wiring, as necessary.

Table 92-13 Troubleshooting -- engine fire detection system

92 -- 68 Functional Test -- engine fire detection system

NOTE Functional testing is performed with engines shut down and is identical for the left and right
engine fire detection system.

EFFECTIVITY S S/N 7 -- 160:


Push circuit breakers 1WB, 2WB.
S S/N 161 and subsequent:
Insert fuses or push circuit breakers 1WG, 2WG.
Warning lights 104WG, 204WG shall illuminate briefly (max. 0.5 sec.).

Revision 26 CHAPTER 92
Page 151
MAINTENANCE MANUAL BO 105

a. Internal lamp testing

-- Press warning lights 104WG, 204WG.

-- Warning lights shall illuminate.

b. Signal circuit testing

-- Press push--to--test switches 103WG, 203WG.

-- Warning lights 104WG, 204WG shall illuminate.

92 -- 69 Removal and installation -- engine fire detection system

1. Detector switches (figure 92--57)

NOTE Removal and installation procedures of the fire detectors are identical for both en-
gines, LH and RH.

a. Removal

-- Switch off the helicopter electrical power supply.

-- Loosen hex nuts (5) and remove together with serrated lock washers (3) and electrical wiring (4).

-- Loosen hex screws (1) and remove together with hex nuts (7), washers (6), and fire detector (2).

b. Installation
Installation is essentially the reverse of the removal.

NOTE Observe identification of electrical wiring when reconnecting the wiring.

2. Control unit

a. Removal

-- Remove lower instrument panel fairing according to chapter 7 and battery according to chapter
92--27.

-- Disconnect the electrical connector 6WGa (24VEa) at the lower side oft the control unit 6WG
(24VE)

-- Loosen round head screws with washers and remove together with control unit from the instrument
panel.

CHAPTER 92
Page 152
MBB HELICOPTERS
MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB - B0 105

b . Installation
I n s t a l l a t i o n i s essentially the reverse of t h e removal.

1 Hex screw
2 Fire detector
3 Serrated lock washer
4 E l e c t r i c a l wiring
5 Hex nut
6 Washer
7 Hex nut

Figure 92-57 Fire Detector Switch

B0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 1531154
'MBB HELICOPTERS'
MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB -
B0 105

92-70 O i 1 c o o l e r f a n f a i l u r e w a r n i n g
s y s t e m (figure 92-58)

The o i l cooler fan f a i l u r e warning system consists of


- d i f f e r e n t i a l pressure switch l l E D
- warning l i g h t lOED

1. General

The o i l cooler fan f a i l u r e warning system monitors the function of the


o i l cooler fan of t h e main transmission.

2. Function
The d i f f e r e n t i a l pressure switch l l E D f o r the o i l cooler fan f a i l u r e
warning i s located on the ram a i r duct assembly above t h e o i l cooler (see
figure 92-49). If an o i l cooler fan f a i l u r e occurs, t h e d i f f e r e n t i a l
pressure switch l l E D completes t h e e l e c t r i c c i r c u i t of the warning l i g h t
l O E D t o ground and t h e "OIL COOLn l i g h t on the instrument panel 2VE
illuminates indicating f a i l u r e i n the o i l cooler fan system.

MAlN BUS

I PRESSURE SWITCH
11 ED
WARNING LIGHT

0 'I
I

* NOTE I £ the emergency bus i s i n s t a l l e d , connect e l e c t r i c a l


wiring t o PP20.

Figure 92-58 O i l Cooler Fan Failure Warning System - Schematic Diagram

B 0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 155
MBB HELICOPTERS
MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB B0 105 -
92 - 71 Troubleshooting - o i l cooler fan f a i l u r e warning system
NO. TROUBLE SYMPTOM PROBABLE CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION

Warning l i g h t lOED Defective d i f f e r e n - Disconnect plug 450Wa.


"OIL COOLn does not t i a l pressure Warning l i g h t lOED "OIL COOLn
extinguish when 70% switch 1 1 E D . must e x t i n g u i s h .
r o t o r speed
i s reached.
Short c i r c u i t t o Check wiring f o r c o n t i n u i t y
ground i n wire using t h e a p p l i c a b l e wiring
ED15F22 o r ED15E22. diagram. Repair o r replace
def e c t i v e wiring.

Table 92-14 Troubleshooting - o i l cooler f a n f a i l u r e warning system

92 - 72 Functional t e s t - oil cooler f a n f a i l u r e warning system

1. With engines o f f

- Connect an e x t e r n a l power u n i t t o t h e h e l i c o p t e r and switch on power


supply t o t h e main bus.
Warning l i g h t "OIL COOLn lOED must i l l u m i n a t e .
2. With engines running a t 70% N2 RPM
- The warning l i g h t "OIL COOLn must extinguish when a r o t o r speed of 70%
i s reached.

92 - 73 Removal and i n s t a l l a t i o n - o i l cooler f a n f a i l u r e warning system


1. D i f f e r e n t i a l pressure switch l l E D

For removal and i n s t a l l a t i o n r e f e r t o chapter 63, Lubrication system.


2. Warning l i g h t lOED (4EV)
For removal and i n s t a l l a t i o n and f o r f u n c t i o n a l tests r e f e r t o paragraph
92-133.

B 0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 156
MAINTENANCE MANUAL BO 105

92 -- 74 FUEL SYSTEM
The fuel system consists of:

-- fuel supply system

-- fuel shutoff valves

-- monitoring systems

92 -- 75 Locations -- fuel system (see figure 92--59)

COMPONENT LOCATION FIG. OR CHAPTER


Warning lights See paragraph 92--133 Fig. 92--97
Circuit breakers See paragraph 92--76
Instruments See paragraph 92
Fuel supply system
Toggle switches 11QM, 12QM S/N 7--160 Instrument panel 2VE Fig. 92--11 Fig. 92--60
13QM and 14QM S/N 161 and subsequent and Se-
ries D Overhead panel 12VE
Fuel pumps 5QM and 6QM Main tank see chapter 62
Fuel pumps 7QM and 8QM Supply tank see chapter 62
Fuel shutoff valves
Toggle switches EMERGENCY Instrument panel 2VE Fig. 92--11 to 92--13
FUEL VALVE I--II (104WA and
204WA)
Fuel shutoff valve 1 and 2 Fuel supply lines between supply see chapter 62
(102WA) tank and engines
Monitoring instruments
Fuel quantity transmitter 3EB Supply tank see chapter 62
Pressure transmitter 101EA Engine compartment 1 and 2 see chapter 62
(201EA)
Differential pressure switch Engine compartment 1 and 2 see chapter 62
103EA
Fuel quantity transmitter 1EB Main tank see chapter 62
Fuel quantity transmitter 2EB Supply tank see chapter 62

Table 92-15 Location -- Fuel system

CHAPTER 92
Page 157
MAINTENANCE MANUAL BO 105

92 -- 76 Protection of circuits of fuel system

NOTE With post SB BO105--90--102 fuses can be replaced by circuit breakers.

The following fuses or circuit breakers are installed to protect the fuel system:

Circuit Code Breaker Protected Circuit Location Identification


Protec-
tion
1QM 5A Fuel pump main tank FUEL PUMPS MAIN TANK

4QM 5A Fuel pump main tank FUEL PUMPS MAIN TANK


Instrument --
2QM 5A Fuel pump supply panel 2VE, see FUEL PUMPS SUPPLY TANK
tank p 91
chapter
10QM 5A Fuel pump supply FUEL PUMPS SUPPLY TANK
tank

3E 1A Fuel quantity indica-


tor
2E 1A Low fuel warning
7E 1A Fuel pressure indica- Instrument
tor panel 2VE, RH
9E 1A Fuel filter clogging in- side see chap-
dicator ter 91
1WA 3A Fuel shutoff valve EMERG. FUEL VALVE I
102WA
2WA 3A Fuel shutoff valve II EMERG. FUEL VALVE II
102WA

Table 92-16 Protection -- Fuel system

CHAPTER 92 Revision 26
Page 158
MBB HELICOPTERS'
MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB - B0 105

1 Instrument panel (2VE)


Circuit breakers (lQM, 4QM; 2QM, 10QM)

EFFECTIVITY -
S/N 7 160
Toggle Switches (3QM, 9QM)

2 -
Fuel pump supply tank (8QM)
3 -
Fuel pump main tank (5QM)
4 -
Fuel pump main tank (6QM)
5
6
Fuel pump- supply tank (7QM)
Overhead panel (12VE)

EFFECTIVITY S/N 161 and subsequent


Toggle Switches (llQM, 12QM, 13QM, 14QM)
Figure 92-59 Fuel Feed System

B 0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 159
MBB HELICOPTERS
MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB - B0 105

Figure 92-60 Blank

B0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 160
MBB HELICOPTERS
MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB B0 105-
92 - 77 F U e 1 s U p p 1y s y s t e m (see f i g u r e 92-61)
1. General

The f u e l supply System c o n s i s t s of two f e e d systems which, independent


of each o t h e r , supply f u e l t o t h e LH and RH e n g i n e . For t h i s purpose, two
f u e l pumps each a r e i n s t a l l e d i n t h e main t a n k 5QM and 6QM and i n t h e
supply tank 7QM and 8QM.
Fuel pumps 5QM and 6QM of main t a n k a r e s u p p l i e d w i t h power from main bus
PP 21 v i a c i r c u i t b r e a k e r s 1QM and 4QM and t o g g l e switches l l Q M and 12QM.
Fuel pumps 7QM and 8QM of supply t a n k a r e s u p p l i e d with power from PP21
v i a c i r c u i t b r e a k e r s 2QM and l O Q M and t o g g l e s w i t c h e s 13QM and 14QM.

EFFECTIVITY Series D
l O Q M i s connected t o emergency bus PP20.

2. Fuel pumps 5QM t o 8QM

NOTE Maintenance/inspection and removal and i n s t a l l a t i o n


procedures a r e d e s c r i b e d i n c h a p t e r 62.
MAlN BUS

OVERHEAD

- ----
FRKD - - W

1
KGHT
I I
15 QM 6 QM 7 QM I
8QM~
I
MAlN TANK
_i L SUPPLY TANK
J
900125

- - -- -
t

F i g u r e 92-61 Fuel Feed System


B0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 1 6 1
MAINTENANCE MANUAL B 0 105

-
92 78 -
Troubleshooting fuel supply system

NO TROUBLE SYMPTOM PROBABLE CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION


Fuel pump (SQM, 6QM, 7QM, Defective circuit breaker (IQM, Replace circuit breaker.
8QM) inoperative 4QM, 2QM, 10QM)

Defective toggle switch Replace toggle switch.

EFFECTlVlTY
SIN 7-160: 3QM, 9QM
SIN 161 and subsequent:
11QM, 12QM, 13QM, 14QM

Defective electrical wiring Check electrical wiring for


continuity using the applicable
wiring diagram (refer to WDM)
and replace defective wiring.

Defectivefuel pump Replace fuel pump.


Table 92-17 Troubleshooting - fuel supply system

-
92 79 Functional test - fuel supply system

NOTE The following functionaltest must be carried out after havingchanged one or more electri-
cal components, cables, electrical connections, etc. of the fuel supply system.

1. Engines must be shut down.

1 2. Connect and switch on external power supply mit, see para 92-33.

1 3. Set BATTERY MASTER switch to BAT OFFIEPU ON.

CHAPTER 92 Revision 21
Page 162
MAINTENANCE MANUAL BO 105

CAUTION IN CASE OF EMPTY FUEL TANKS, THE MAXIMUM DRY RUNNING TIME OF FUEL
PUMPS MUST NOT EXCEED 15 MIN.

4. Push circuit breakers (1QM, 4QM for main tank, 2QM, 10QM for supply tank)

5. Set toggle switches for fuel pumps in position “ON”.

EFFECTIVITY From S/N 7 - 160 installed in instrument panel 2VE


Main tank LH/RH 3QM
Supply tank LH/RH 9QM

S/N 161 and subsequent; installed in overhead panel 12VE


Main tank 11QM LH, 12QM RH
Supply tank 13QM LH, 14QM RH

6. Operation of the respective fuel pump must be audible.

EFFECTIVITY Fuel pump in the supply tank


Dual fuel pressure indicator reading for the respective fuel pump must be within the
specified limits (refer to FLM).

Fuel pump in the main tank


Dual fuel quantity indicator reading must increase on the supply side.

7. Set toggle switches in position “OFF” and pull circuit breakers.

92 -- 80 Fuel shutoff system (see figure 92-62)


The electrical system for fuel shutoff consists of:

-- two emergency fuel valves, 102WA and 202WA for engine 1 and engine 2 respectively

-- two toggle switches 104WA and 204WA and

-- two circuit breakers 1WA and 2WA for protection


The emergency fuel valves are motor--operated valves, installed in the two fuel feed lines between supply tank
and engines in the LH and RH fuselage side shell respectively (see figure 92-63). In an emergency (e.g. fire),
the fuel supply to the engines can thus be interrupted.
The motors are of the dual field winding configuration, with one winding each for opening and closing operation.
They are activated by toggle switches 104WA, 204WA ”EMERG. FUEL VALVE I--II”. Toggle switches are
installed in the instrument panel 2VE and protected by safety--covers.The motors are automatically switched
off by limit switches.
The system is supplied with electrical power via circuit breakers 1WA, 2WA “EMERG. FUEL VALVE I--II” from
main bus PP 21 or emergency bus PP 20 respectively.

EFFECTIVITY Series D
Electrical power is supplied from connection 1 of fuse /circuit breaker 25P at the
instrument panel 2VE.
Circuit breakers 1WA, 2WA ”EMERG. FUEL VALVE I--II”.

NOTE For removal, installation and leakage test procedures refer to chapter 62.

Revision 26 CHAPTER 92
Page 163
MAINTENANCE MANUAL BO 105

With circuit breakers pushed and toggle switches in the ”CLOSED” position, the motors will close the valves
in the fuel feed lines and thus shut off the fuel supply to the engines.

MAIN BUS
PP21 28V

CIRCUIT BREAKER 1WA CIRCUIT BREAKER 2WA

CLOSED CLOSED
OPEN OPEN

TOGGLE SWITCH 104WA TOGGLE SWITCH 204WA

EMERG. FUEL VALVE EMERG. FUEL VALVE


102 WA 202 WA
BO105_WAH_1583_R

Figure 92--62 Fuel shutoff system

CHAPTER 92 Revision 21
Page 164
MAINTENANCE MANUAL B 0 105

I
1 Circuit breakers (1WA, 2WA)
Togqle switches (104WA, 204WA)
Instrument panel (2VE)

I
2 Emergencv fuel valve (202WA)
RH engine

3 Emer~encyfuel valve (102WA)


LH engine

Figure 92-63 Locations - Fuel shutoff system

Revision 21 CHAPTER 92
Page 165
MAlNTENANCE MANUAL B 0 105

BLANK PAGE

CHAPTER 92
Page 166 Revision 21
MAINTENANCE MANUAL B 0 105

92 81- -
Troubleshooting fuel shutoff system 4
NO.
-- TROUBLE SYMPTOM PROBABLE CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
1. Emergency fuel valve 102WA or Defective fuel valve
202WA neither Opens nor
closes.
Defective circuit breaker 1WA or
2WA
Replace fuel valve.

Replace circuit breaker.


I
Defective toggle switch 104WA Replace toggle switch.
or 204WA
Defective electrical wiring Check wiring for continuity using
the applicable wiring diagram
(refer to WDM) and replace
defective wiring.
-
Table 92-18 Troubleshooting fuel shutoff system

92 82- -
Functionaltest fuel shutoff system

NOTE The following test must be carried out after replacement of one or both fuel shutoff valves.

1. Engines must be shut down.

2. Connect and switch on external power supply unit, See Para 92-33.

3. Set BAlTERY MASTER switch to BAT OFFIEPU ON.

4. Push circuit breaker IWA, 2WA "EMERG. FUEL VALVE I-II".

5. Close emergency fuel valve.

a. Removesafety cover of toggleswitch 104WA, 204WAUEMERG.FUELVALVEI-llnandsettoggle switch


to the "CLOSED" position.

b. Closingof emergencyfuel valve must be audible. Emergencyfuel valve mustswitchoff whenfully closed.

EFFECTIVITY SIN 7-350


Pointer in sight glass of emergency fuel valve must point at "F.

SIN 351 and subsequent

Position of mechanical see-feel indicator at emergency fuel valve: @

Revision 21 CHAPTER 92
Page 167
MAINTENANCE MANUAL B 0 105

I6. Open emergency fuel valve.

II a. Set toggle switch 104WA, 204WA "EMERG. FUELVALVE CII" to the "OPEN" positionand reinstallthe
safety Cover.

b. Openingof emergencyfuelvalvemust beaudible. Emergencyfuelvalve mustswitch off whenfully open.

EFFECTIVITY SIN 7 3 5 0
Pointer in sight glass of emergency fuel valve must point at 'W.

SIN 351 and subsequent

Position ot mechanical see-feel indicator at emergency fuel vahre: @

I
7. Pull circuit breaker 1WA, 2WA "EMERG. FUEL VALVE 1-11",

92 83 - -
Leakage test fuel shutoff System

1. Close emergency fuel valves as described in para 92-82.

2. Switch on fuel pumps in the supply tank.


There must be no pressure indication on the dual fuel pressure indicator.

3. Open emergency fuel valves as described in para 92-82.


A minimum pump pressure of 0.7 bar must be shown on the dual fuel pressure indicator.

4. Switch off fuel pumps.

CHAPTER 92 Revision 21
Page 168
MAINTENANCE MANUAL BO 105

92 -- 84 Monitoring -- fuel supply system


The following monitoring systems are installed for continuous monitoring of the fuel system:

-- fuel quantity monitoring, see chapter 91

-- low fuel warning, see paragraph 92--85

-- fuel pressure monitoring, see chapter 91

-- fuel filter bypass warning, see paragraph 92--86

92 -- 85 Low fuel warning system (see figure 92--64 and 92--65)

1. General
The low fuel warning system provides warning light indication when a certain fuel level limit is reached in
the supply tank.
The low fuel warning transmitter 3EB consists of a float interconnected with a switch contact and is located
in the supply tank.

EFFECTIVITY S S/N 7 -- 120


Warning indication is via warning light 7EB ”LOW FUEL” on the instrument panel and
via additional red warning light located in the lower portion of the dual fuel quantity
indicator 5EB.
S S/N 121 and subsequent
Warning indication is via warning light 7EB ”LOW FUEL”.
The system is supplied with electrical power via fuse / circuit breaker 2E from the main bus PP21 or emer-
gency bus PP20. Lamp testing is made by depressing the test switch 6EB ”TEST WARN. LIGHTS”.

Revision 26 CHAPTER 92
Page 169
MAINTENANCE MANUAL BO 105

2. Function
If the fuel level in the supply tank falls below the permissible limit, the float closes the switch contact in the
low fuel warning transmitter and thus the warning light circuit.

FUSE
(CIRCUIT
BREAKER)
BO105_WAH_1585_R

Figure 92--64 Low Fuel Warning System

CHAPTER 92 Revision 26
Page 170
MAINTENANCE MANUAL BO 105

1
2

1
BO105_WAH_1490_R

1 Instrument Panel 2VE


Fuse / circuit breaker 2E
Dual fuel quantity indicator 5EB
Warning light 7EB
Test switch 6EB

2 Supply Tank
Low fuel warning transmitter 3EB

Figure 92--65 Locations, Low Fuel Warning System

Revision 26 CHAPTER 92
Page 171
MAINTENANCE MANUAL BO 105

3. Troubleshooting -- Low Fuel Warning System

NO. TROUBLE SYMPTOM PROBABLE CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION


1. Warning light ”LOW FUEL” 7EB Defective fuse / circuit breaker Replace fuse / circuit breaker.
inoperative. 2E.
Defective diode 9EB. Check diode; replace if neces-
sary.
Defective bulbs. Replace bulbs.
Defective electrical wiring be- Check wiring for continuity us-
tween main bus and warning ing the applicable wiring dia-
light. gram and replace defective wir-
ing.
2. EFFECTIVITY S/N 7 -- 120
Warning light located in dual Defective fuse / circuit breaker Replace fuse / circuit breaker.
fuel quantity indicator 5EB inop- 3E. Defective bulb. Replace bulb.
erative
Defective electrical wiring be- Check wiring for continuity us-
tween main bus and dual fuel ing the applicable wiring dia-
quantity indicator. gram (refer to WDM) and re-
place defective wiring.
Defective electrical wiring be- Check wiring for continuity us-
tween warning light 7EB and ing the applicable wiring dia-
dual fuel quantity indicator. gram (refer to WDM) and re-
place defective wiring, as re-
quired.
3. Both warning lights inoperative. Defective transmitter 3EB. Replace transmitter.
Defective electrical wiring be- Check wiring for continuity us-
tween transmitter and warning ing the applicable wiring dia-
light 7EB. gram (refer to WDM) and re-
place defective wiring, as re-
quired.

Table 92-19 Troubleshooting -- Low fuel warning system

NOTE Maintenance/inspection, removal and installation refer to chapter 62.

CHAPTER 92 Revision 26
Page 172
MAINTENANCE MANUAL BO 105

92 -- 86 Differential fuel pressure (BYPASS) warning system (see figures 92--66 and 92--67)

1. General
The system provides warning light indication on the instrument panel 2VE when fuel filters in the engine
assembly fuel pumps are contaminated.
Differential pressure switches 103EA, 203EA, installed in the bypass lines of the fuel filters are used as
signal transmitters.
They consist of diaphragm--operated switches, which close when fuel pressure increases. Indication is pro-
vided by warning light 1EA with legends ”FILT 1” for the LH engine and ”FILT 2” for the RH engine. The
system is supplied with electrical power via fuse / circuit breaker 9E from the main bus PP21 and emer-
gency bus PP20 respectively. Lamp testing is by depressing test switch 6EB ”TEST WARN. LIGHTS”.

2. Function
Heavy contamination of the fuel filter, causes a pressure increase in the bypass lines. The differential pres-
sure switch will close and thus complete the warning light circuit.

FUSE
(CIRCUIT
BREAKER)
BO105_WAH_1584_R

Figure 92--66 Differential Fuel Pressure Warning System

Revision 26 CHAPTER 92
Page 173
MAINTENANCE MANUAL BO 105

2, 3

1
3
BO105_WAH_1491_R

1 Instrument Panel 2VE


Fuse / circuit breaker 9E
Warning light 1EA
Test switch 6EB

2 Differencial pressure switch 103EA


3 Differencial pressure switch 203EA

Figure 92--67 Locations, Differential Fuel Pressure Warning System

CHAPTER 92 Revision 26
Page 174
MAINTENANCE MANUAL BO 105

3. Troubleshooting -- Differential Fuel Pressure Warning System

NO. TROUBLE SYMPTOM PROBABLE CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION


1. Warning light 1EA inoperative. Fuse / circuit breaker 9E defec- Replace fuse / circuit breaker.
tive.
Defective differential pressure Replace differential pressure
switch 103EA, 203EA. switch.
Defective bulbs. Replace bulbs.
Defective diodes 5WW, 7WW. Check diode; replace as neces-
sary.
Defective electrical wiring. Check wiring for continuity us-
ing the applicable diagram (re-
fer to WDM) and replace defec-
tive wiring.
2. Both legends ”FILT 1” and Defective diode 4WW or 6WW. Check diode; replace as neces-
”FILT 2” of warning light 1EA il- sary.
luminate when only one differ-
ential pressure switch is acti-
vated.

Table 92-20 Troubleshooting -- Differential fuel pressure warning system

NOTE Maintenance/inspection, removal and installation refer to chapter 62.

92 -- 87 CONTROL SYSTEMS
The control systems are the following:

-- hydraulic system

-- cyclic stick trim

-- cyclic stick

-- collective pitch

Revision 26 CHAPTER 92
Page 175
MAINTENANCE MANUAL BO 105

92 -- 88 Locations -- control systems

COMPONENT LOCATION FIGURE


Warning lights see paragraph 92--133 92--97

Circuit breaker see paragraph 92--89 92--11 to 92--13

Hydraulic system
Hydraulic switch--over relay 6DB Instrument panel 2VE 92--68

Hydraulic test switch 5DB Instrument panel 2VE 92--68 and 92--11 to 92--13

Pressure switch system 1, 2DB;


Pressure switch system 2, 4DB; see chapter 43 92--68
Microswitch 10DB1 to 10DB6; Hydraulic unit
Solenoid valve 8DB

Cyclic stick trim


Actuators 6CC and 7CC Nose shell Fig. 92--71

Four--way switch 2CC Cyclic stick grip 3/4VE Fig. 92--71

Retraction and extension relay Relay box 10VE Fig. 92--8 and 92--9
6CC to 11CC

Table 92-21 Locations -- control systems

92 -- 89 Protection of circuits of control systems


The following circuit breakers are installed to protect the control systems:

CIRCUIT BREAKER PROTECTED LOCATION IDENTIFICATION


CODE PROTECTION CIRCUIT
1DB 5A Hydraulic sys- Instrument HYDRAULIC (S/N 7 -- 160),
tem panel 2VE HYDR. CONTROL (S/N 161
and subsequent),
HYDR. SYSTEM (series D,
CB--5, CBS--5 and DBS--5)
1CC 2A Cyclic stick Instrument TRIMMING,
trim panel 2VE TRIM ACTUATORS (series D,
CB--5, CBS--5 and DBS--5)
Table 92-22 Protection of control systems

CHAPTER 92 Revision 22
Page 176
MAINTENANCE MANUAL.B 0 105

-
92 90 Hydraulic system (see figures 92-68 thru 92-70)

NOTE For description, maintenance/inspection, removal and installation refer to chapter 43. 1
The hydraulic system utilizes a hydraulic pressure monitoring system and an electrically initiated system
switch-over. I

1 Instrument panel (2VE) 2 Dual hvdraulic booster


Circuit breaker (1DB) Pressure switch, system 1 (208)
Warning light ( ~ E B )- Pressure switch, system 2 ( ~ D B )
Warning light (3DB) Solenoid valve (8DB)
Hydraulic test switch (5DB) Microswitch systern switch-over
Test switch (6EB) (1ODB1,l ODB2,l ODB3,l ODB4,
Relay (6DB) 10DB5,10DB6)
Diode (7DB)
Printed circuit board (1WW)

Figure 92-68 -
Locations Hydraulic system

Revision 22 CHAPTER 92
Page 177
MAINTENANCE MANUAL B 0 105

92 - 91 Hydraulic pressure monitoring system (see figure 9249)

1. Desciiption
Each system (1 and 2) is equipped with a pressure switch 2DB, 4DB. The'pressure switch is hydraulically
operated and closes when hydraulic pressure falls below 72-65 bar. Warning indication is via warning light
3DB, with legends "HYDR. 1" and "HYDR. P,located on the instrument panel2VE.
The system is supplied with electricalpower from mainbus PP21or emergencybus PP20viacircuit breaker
1DB "HYDRAULIC' (SIN 7-160), "HYDR. CONTROL" (SIN 161 and subsequent) or "HYDR. SYSTEM
(series D, CBS-5 and DBS-5). Lamp testing of warning lights is carried-out by means of test switch 6EB
'TEST WARN. LIGHTS.

< ~~iiCUIT BREAKER


WARNING LIGHT 3DB 17WW
-T TEST SWITCH

PRESSURE , PRESSURE
-
EI
5
SWITCH
S
4BD
M2 8 SWITCH
SYSTEM 1
2DB

Figure 92-69 Hydraulic pressure monitoring system

CHAPTER 92 Revision 2 2
Page 178
MAINTENANCE MANUAL B 0 105

-
2. Troubleshooting hydraulic pressure monitoring system

NO. TROUBLE SYMPTOM PROBABLE CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION


P -P - - - - - -

1. No indication from warning light Pressure switch 2DB or 4DB Check pressure switch and re-
3DB "HYDR. 1" or "HYDR. 2" not closed place as required
although system is unpressur-
ized
Defective circuit breaker 1DB Check circuit breaker and re-
place as required
Defective diode 7DB Check diode and replace as re-
quired
Both lamps of either warning Check both lamps and replace
light defective as required
Defective wiring Check wiring for continuity us-
ing the applicable wiring dia-
gram (refer to WDM). Repair or
replace, as necessary
2. Waming light 3DB "HYDR. 1" or Pressure switch 2DB or 4DB Check pressure switch and re-
"HYDR. 2" illuminates, although does not Open place as required
system is pressurized
Short circuit to ground Check wiring for continuity us-
ing the applicable wiring dia-
gram (refer to WDM). Repair or
replace, as necessary
Table 92-23 Troubleshooting - hydraulic pressure monitoring system I

Revision 22 CHAPTER 92
Page 179
MAINTENANCE MANUAL B 0 105

-
92 92 Electrically initiated system switch-over - hydraulic system (refer to Figure 92-70)
1. Description
Each of the three actuators of hydraulic system 1 is equipped with two microswitch assys 1ODB1110DB2,
1ODB3/10DB4,10DB5/10DB6. Each microswitchassy consists of two microswitchesconnected inparallel.
If a control spool jamming occurs in an actuator of system 1, the override mechanism actuates one of the
microswitches, energizing the relay 6DB (even aiter a very short period of actuation), which then closes
the solenoid valve 8DB. The relay 6DB is self-locking in a holding circuit via one of its contacts and the
hydraulictest switch 5DB. Dueto the relays 6DB holdingcircuit, the solenoidvalve 8DB remains energized
and thus closed.
The solenoid valve 8DB closes the pressure supply line of system 1 to the shuttle valve and connects the
system-1-line of the shuttle valve to the low pressure return line. This situation for the shuttle valve now
looks like a lossof pressure in system 1, and as a reactionit closesthe selector valve of systeml and Opens
the selector valve of system 2: the actuators of system 2 are pressurized, the actuators of system 1 are
on idle. Now the control spools of the actuators of system 2 control the helicopter instead of the jammed
control spools of system 1.
The second contact of the relay 6DB closes the circuit of waming light 7EB "HY BLOCK" on the instrument
panel2VE, which illuminates, indicating the switch-over to system 2.

EFFECTIVITY Dual hydraulic boosters with PIN 105-83001, 10583011, 10545028 with
CAA-Retrofitkii 105-45018,105-45039 and 105-450390
In addition to "HY BLOCK" warning, pressure switch 2DB will close and warning light 3DB "HYDR. 1" will
illuminate.

Functional testing of the system is carried-out by means of hydraulic test switch 5DB "HYDRAUL" (SIN
7-1 60) or "HYDR. TEST" (SIN 161 and subsequent) on the instrument panel2VE. The switch is spring
loaded to position "TEST" ("HYDR IP) and "RESET". In position "TEST" ("HYDR II")it simulates a control
spool jamming in an actuator of system 1 by energizing the relay 6DB. In position "RESET" it deenergizes
the self-locking relay 6DB by opening the holding circuit. The original situation (systeml active) is thus re-
stored.
The system is suppliedwith electrical power from main bus PP21 or emergency bus PP20viacircuitbreaker
1DB "HYDRAULIC" (SIN 7-160), "HYDR. CONTROLn (SIN 161 and subsequent) or "HYDR. SYSTEMn
(series D, CBS-5 and DBS-5). Lamp testing of warning lights is carried-out by means of test switch 6EB
'TEST WARN. LIGHTS.

CHAPTER 92 Revision 22
Page 180
MAINTENANCE MANUAL B 0 105

MAlN BUS

CIRCUIT BREAKER ----

21WW
WARNING SYSTEM

I
MlCROSWlTCH
ASSY 1ODB1.1ODB2

Figure 92-70 Etectrically initiated system switch-over

Revision 22 CHAPTER 92
Page 181
MAINTENANCE MANUAL B 0 105

1 2. Troubleshooting - electrically initiated system switch-over- hydraulic system

NO. TROUBLE SYMPTOM PROBABLE CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION


1. No indicationfrom warning light Defective relay 6DB Check.coil and contacts and re-
7EB "HY BLOCK" during over- place relay as required
ride or testing
Defective diode 7DB Check diode and replace as re-
quired
Defective circuit breaker 1DB Check circuit breaker and re-
place, as required
Microswitch assy does not Check microswitch and replace
close as required
Defective hydraulic test switch Check hydraulic test switch and
5DB replace as required
Both lamps of warning light de- Check lamps and replace as re-
fective quired
Defective electrical wiring Check wiring for continuity us-
ing the applicable wiring dia-
gram (refer to WDM). Repair or
replace as necessary
2. Warning light 7EB "HY BLOCK" Contact of relay 6DB does not Check relay contact and re-
does not extinguish open place relay as required
Microswitch assy does not Open Check microswitch and replace
as required
Defective hydraulic test switch Check hydraulic test switch and
508 replace as required
3. Solenoid valve 8DB closes for a Defective relay 6DB Check coil and contacts and re-
short time only place relay as required
Defective electrical wiring Check wiring for continuity us-
ing the applicable wiring dia-
gram (refer to WDM). Repair or
replace as necessary

I Table 92-24 Troubleshooting- electrically initiated system switch-over - hydraulic system (1 of 2)

CHAPTER 92 Revision 22
Page 182
MAINTENANCE MANUAL B 0 105

NO. TROUBLE SYMPTOM PROBABLE CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION


4. Solenoid vahre 8DB does not
close:
a. at override and hydraulic test Defective solenoid valve Check solenoid valve and re-
place as required
Defective circuit breaker 1DB Check circuit breaker and re-
place as required
Defective electrical wiring Check wiring for wntinuity us-
ing the applicable wiring dia-
gram (refer to WDM). Repair or
replace as necessary
b. at override only Defective micm-switch assy Check microswitch and replace
as required
Defective electrical wiring Check wiring as described
above
C. at hydraulic test only Defective hydraulic test switch Check hydraulic test switch and
5DB replace as required
Defective electrical wiring Check wiring as described
above
5. Solenoid valve does not Open Contact of relay 6DB does not Check relay contact and re-
open place relay as required
Microswitch assy does not Open Check microswitch and replace
as required
Defective hydraulic test switch Check hydraulic test switch and
5DB replace as required
Short circuit to ground Check wiring for wntinuity us-
ing the applicable wiring dia-
gram (refer to WDM). Repair or
replace as necessary
Table 92-24 Troubleshooting - electrically initiated system switch-over - hydraulic system (2 of 2) 1

Revision 22 CHAPTER 92
Page 183
MAINTENANCE MANUAL B 0 105

BLANK PAGE

CHAPTER 92 Revision-22
Page 184
MAINTENANCE MANUAL B 0 105

-
92 93 Cyclic stick trim (see figures 92-71 to 92-79)
The cyclic stick trim consists of:
- trim actuator 6CC (longitudinal) and trim actuator 7CC (lateral)

- retraction relays 8CC and 1OCC

- extension rejays 9CC and 11CC

- one each four-way switch 2CC for pilot and copilot

1. General
The hydraulicsystem installed in the helicopter allows for a transmissionof cyclic blade pitch changeswith
reducedeffort requiredfor control inputsat the cyclic stick. To give the pilot nevertheless an artificialcontrol
feel when moving the cyclic stick, provisions are made that a counteracting force of a preloaded spring
(compression spring) must be overcome.
In order to facilitate control of the helicopter in certain flight attitudes (hovering, cruise), it is possible for the
pilot (copilot) to trim off the cyclic stick pressure holdingthe cyclic stick 314VE (dual control) in the particular
position. This is achieved by movingthe four-way switch 2CC on the cyclic stick grip in the Same direction
as that in which the cyclic stick is being held. A trim actuator for the longitudinaland for the lateral direction
I
respectivelyis installedparallelto the correspondingtrim spring and connectedto the spring tube via a lever.
Depending on the position of the four-way switch, the trim actuators extend or retract, relieving the load
on the trim spring. The pressure on the cyclic stick is thus reduced. I
The trim actuators are located in the nose shell between the trim spring tube and the cyclic stick (refer to
figure 92-72). Electrical power is supplied from the main bus PP21 via circuit breaker 1CC.

Revision 22 CHAPTER 92
Page 185
MBB HELICOPTERS
MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB - B0 105

1 T r i m actuator, l a t e r a l 7CC
2 C i r c u i t breaker 1CC
3 Four-way switch 2CC
4 Trim actuator, longitudinal 6CC
5 Relay box 1O V E

Figure 92-71 Locations - Trimming

B0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 186
MBB HELICOPTERS
MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB - B 0 105

1 Compression s p r i n g
(lateral)
2 Trim a c t u a t o r 7CC
3 Compression s p r i n g
(longitudinal)
4 Relay box lOVE
. 5 T r i m a c t u a t o r 6CC

Figure 92-72 Locations - Trimming

2. Function (see f i g u r e 92-73)


a. Four-way switch 2CC i n p o s i t i o n "Left" = L a t e r a l trirrUning, t r i m
a c t u a t o r 7CC w i l l extend.
The voltage a p p l i e d a t c e n t e r c o n t a c t of four-way switch 2CC
energizes t h e c o i l of t h e extend r e l a y 11CC.
The energized r e l a y switches t h e power supply t o t h e trim a c t u a t o r
7CC v i a second normally-closed c o n t a c t of t h e r e t r a c t r e l a y 10CC.
C i r c u i t t o ground i s provided v i a switching contact of t h e de-ener-
gized r e t r a c t r e l a y and v i a limit switch, which i s closed u n t i l t h e
extend motion i s completed.
b. Four-way switch 2CC i n p o s i t i o n "Right" = L a t e r a l trirrUning, t r i m
a c t u a t o r 7CC w i l l r e t r a c t .

B 0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 187
MBB HELICOPTERS
MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB -
B0 105

MAlN BUS

--T
FOUR WAY SWlTCH 2CC FOUR-WAY SWITCH 2CC
CO-PILOT PILOT
RETRACT
LATERAL

LONGITUDINAL
LONGIT.

- L I

EXTEND
LATERAL
7-

0
I

zI l - A
_
T
I
I
I
-!
r
i I
I

z - 8CC '

j
----Y ---------
3
I 0 0 7
I I

-
4 I
I EXTEND RETRACT . I
I

-3
I
I I -
C
I
I I I

L- --- - - -i ---------J
TRlM ACTUATOR (LONGITUDINAL) 6CC TRlM ACTUATOR (LATERAL) 7CC

Figure 92-73 Cyclic stick trim


B0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 188
MBB HELICOPTERS
MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB B0 105-
The voltage i s directed from the four-way switch 2CC t o the c o i l of
the r e t r a c t relay 10CC.
The trim actuator 7CC i s supplied with e l e c t r i c a l power via closed
limit switch ( u n t i l r e t r a c t motion i s completed) and via switching
contact of the r e t r a c t relay 10CC.
The c i r c u i t t o ground i s again provided v i a switching contact of the
energized r e t r a c t relay.

C. Four-way switch 2CC i n position "Forwardn = Longitudinal Trimming,


t r i m actuator 6CC w i l l extend.
The voltage applied a t center contact of four-way switch 2CC
energizes t h e c o i l of the extend relay 9CC.
The energized relay switches the power supply t o the trim actuator
6CC via switching contact of the r e t r a c t relay 8CC. The c i r c u i t t o
ground i s provided via second switching contact of the deenergized
r e t r a c t relay and v i a l i m i t switch, which remains closed u n t i l extend
motion i s completed.

d. Four-way switch 2CC i n position "Aft" = Longitudinal trirmaing, trim


actuator 6CC w i l l r e t r a c t .
The voltage i s directed from the four-way switch 2CC t o t h e c o i l of
the r e t r a c t relay 8CC.
The trim actuator 6CC i s supplied with e l e c t r i c a l power via closed
limit switch ( u n t i l r e t r a c t motion i s completed) and via switching
contact of t h e r e t r a c t relay 8CC. The c i r c u i t t o ground i s again
provided via switching contact of t h e energized r e t r a c t relay.

e. P r i o r i t y four-way switch 2CC "Pilotn (dual control)


In case the four-way switch 2CC "Copilot" i s actuated i n one of the
positions described under 2 a . t o d., the p i l o t may interrupt the
t r i m i n g a t any time and even trim i n the opposite direction by
actuating h i s four-way switch 2CC ( r e f e r t o figure 92-73).

92 - 94 Troubleshooting - cyclic s t i c k trim


1. General

Troubleshooting i s performed w i t h an external power source connected t o


the helicopter and w i t h c i r c u i t breaker 1CC depressed. Open nose s h e l l
for t e s t i n g the operation of the trim actuators.

B0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 189
MBB HELICOPTERS'
MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB - B0 105
For troubleshooting the systems use t h e appropriate wiring diagrams
incorporated i n t h e Wiring Diagram Manual (WDM). Troubleshooting and
corrective action o f ' t h e system related mechanical components a r e
described i n chapter 41. For functional t e s t i n g r e f e r t o 92-95.

CAUTION BEWARE OF DANGER OF SHORT-CIRCUITING WHEN


MEASURING LIVE COMPONENTS !
Check e l e c t r i c a l wiring, connections and c i r c u i t breakers of the system
f o r secure i n s t a l l a t i o n and damage.

NO. TROUBLE SYMPTOM PROBABLE CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION

1 T r i m actuator 7CC Defective extend Check relay a t connections


( l a t e r a l ) does not relay 11CC. lOVEA and lOVEB f o r con-
extend. t i n u i t y using the wiring
diagram, or check by tempo-
r a r i l y replacing with a new
relay .
Replace defective relay.
Defective trim Check t r i m actuator for cor-
actuator 7CC. r e c t power supply. Replace
defective trim actuator.
2 T r i m actuator 7CC Def ective r e t r a c t Check relay a t connections
( l a t e r a l ) does not relay 10CC. lOVEA, lOVEB for continuity
retract . using t h e wiring diagram or
check by temporarily replac-
ing with a new relay.
Replace defective relay.
3 Trim actuator 6CC Defective extend Check relay a t connections
(longitudinal) does relay 9CC. lOVEA, lOVEB f o r continuity
not extend. using t h e wiring diagram or
check by temporarily replac-
ing w i t h a new relay.
Replace def ective relay .
Defective trim Check power supply t o trim
actuator 6CC. actuator .
Replace defective trim
actuator .

Table 92-25 Troubleshooting - Cyclic s t i c k trim (1 of 2 )

B0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 190
'MBB HELICOPTERS
- B0 105
'

MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB

TROUBLESHOOTING (continued)

NO. TROUBLE SYMPTOM PROBABLE CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION

4 T r i m actuator 6CC Defective r e t r a c t Check relay a t cannections


(longitudinal) relay 8CC. lOVEA, lOVEB f o r continuity
does not r e t r a c t . using the wiring diagram or
check by temporarily replac-
ing with a new relay.
Replace def ective relay .

5 P r i o r i t y four-way Defective relay Check by temporarily replac-


switch '2CC n P i l o t n r e l a t i v e t o four- ing w i t h a new relay.
inoperative. way switch position. Replace defective relay.

Table 92-25 Troubleshooting - Cyclic s t i c k trim ( 2 of 2)

92 - 95 Functional t e s t - cyclic s t i c k trim

1. General

This functional t e s t must be carried out a f t e r having changed one or more


e l e c t r i c a l components, cables, e l e c t r i c a l connection of the cyclic s t i c k
trim system.
2. Test equipment
- hydraulic ground service c a r t
3. Preparations
- both engines must be shut down
- connect and switch on external power supply unit
- push c i r c u i t breaker 1CC "TRIMn, f o r Series D "TRIM ACTUATORSn
- connect the hydraulic ground service c a r t
- s e t BATTERY MASTER switch t o ON or EPU t o ON.
NOTE When actuating t h e four-way switch t o the following
switch positions, the cyclic s t i c k must become force-
f r e e i n whatever stationary position.
In case a force-free condition of t h e cyclic s t i c k can
not be obtained, t r a v e l direction of trim actuators
must be checked.

B0 105
CKAPTER 92
Page 1 9 1
MBB HELICOPTERS
MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB B 0 105 -
4. Performance of t e s t
a. L a t e r a l t r M n g ( t r i m a c t u a t o r 7CC)

1) Move c y c l i c s t i c k within t h e a c t u a t o r t r a v e l range t o t h e " l e f t n


and hold i n t h i s p o s i t i o n .

2) Push four-way switch 2CC t o t h e l e f t and hold u n t i l c y c l i c s t i c k


becomes force-free (trim a c t u a t o r 7CC extends) .
3) Move c y c l i c s t i c k within t h e a c t u a t o r t r a v e l range p a s t n e u t r a l
position t o t h e "rightn.

4) Push four-way switch 2CC t o t h e r i g h t and hold u n t i l c y c l i c s t i c k


becomes force-free (trim a c t u a t o r r e t r a c t s ) .

5) Trim l a t e r a l c o n t r o l t o n e u t r a l ( n e u t r a l p o s i t i o n of c y c l i c
stick) .

b. Longitudinal trinuning ( t r i m a c t u a t o r 6CC)

1) Move c y c l i c s t i c k within t h e a c t u a t o r t r a v e l range "forwardn and


hold i n t h i s p o s i t i o n .

2) Push four-way switch 2CC forward and hold u n t i l c y c l i c s t i c k


becomes f o r c e - f r e e (trim a c t u a t o r 6CC e x t e n d s ) .

3) Move c y c l i c s t i c k within t h e a c t u a t o r t r a v e l range p a s t n e u t r a l


position i n "aftn direction.

4) Push four-way switch 2CC a f t and hold u n t i l c y c l i c s t i c k becomes


force-free (trim a c t u a t o r 6CC r e t r a c t s ) .

5) T r i m l o n g i t u d i n a l c o n t r o l t o n e u t r a l ( n e u t r a l p o s i t i o n of c y c l i c
stick).
C. Testing of l i m i t switches
Consecutively switch four-way switch 2CC t o a l l four p o s i t i o n s and
hold i n each p o s i t i o n f o r s e v e r a l seconds.
The trim a c t u a t o r s w i l l r e t r a c t o r extend according t o t h e s e l e c t e d
switch p o s i t i o n and a r e automatically switched o f f by limit switches
i n each t r a v e l d i r e c t i o n .

Testing t h e p r i o r i t y s t a t u s of t h e four-way switch 2CC " P i l o t n (only


with dual c o n t r o l system).
Switch four-way switch 2CC "Copilotn t o a l l f o u r p o s i t i o n s i n t u r n ,
t r i m a c t u a t o r 6CC and 7CC must r e t r a c t o r extend according t o t h e
switch p o s i t i o n .
Simultaneously switch four-way switch 2CC " P i l o t n t o t h e opposite
switch p o s i t i o n s . Trim a c t u a t o r 6CC o r 7CC must change i t s d i r e c t i o n
of t r a v e l .
T r i m a c t u a t o r s a r e automatically switched o f f by limit switches
installed i n the actuators.

NOTE Maintenance/inspection, removal and i n s t a l l a t i o n


procedures a r e described i n c h a p t e r 43.
B0 1 0 5
CHAPTER 92
Page 192
MBB HELICOPTERS
MAINTENANCE MANüAL MBB - B0 105
92 - 96 C y C 1i C s t i C k g r i p (see f i g u r e 92-74)

The g r i p and c y c l i c s t i c k a r e connected v i a connector 3/4VE and screwed


together with an adapter assy.
The c y c l i c s t i c k g r i p includes t h r e e push button switches, a fbur-way beeper
switch and a two-stage push-to-talk button (PTT b u t t o n ) . Push button switch
2EW i s used f o r RPM warning suppression and push button switch 7CA f o r
disengaging SAS, i f i n s t a l l e d . The t h i r d push button switch i s spare. On
stage 1 of t h e PTT button 14RF, intercomunication i s switched on, whereas
stage 2 i s f o r transmission (actuating button f u l l y depressed).
The four-way beeper switch 2CC i s used f o r longitudinal and l a t e r a l trirmaing.

1 Four-way beeper switch 2CC


2 Push button switch (RPM
warning suppression) 2EW
spare
3 Push button switch (RPM
warning suppression) 2EW
spare
4 Push button switch SAS
DISENGAGE 7CA
5 Knurled nut (adapter assy)
6 Cyclic s t i c k
7. PTT button 14RF

EFFECTIVITY

-
S/N 7 160
S/N 161 and subsequent

Figure 92-74 Cyclic Stick Grip

B0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 193
MBB HELICOPTERS
MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB B 0 105 -
92 - 97 Removal and i n s t a l l a t i o n - c y c l i c s t i c k g r i p (see f i g u r e 92-75)

1. Removal

a. Loosen knurled nut (3) and p u l 1 g r i p (1) from c y c l i c s t i c k ( 4 ) .


3 r o t e c t connector (2) with a cap.
2. Installation
a. Remove cap from connector ( 2 ) , s l i p on g r i p (1) and secure with
knurled nut (3) t o c y c l i c s t i c k .

1 Grip
2 Connector
3 Knurled nut
4 Cyclic s t i c k

Figure 92-75 Removal and i n s t a l l a t i o n - cyclic stick grip

B0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 194
MBB HELICOPTERS
MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB B0 105 -
92 - 98 Removal and i n s t a l l a t i o n - four-way beeper switch 2CC
(see figure 92-76)

NOTE Screws (9, 1 0 , 19, 20, f i g u r e 92-76), threaded pin (7) and pin
(18) a r e potted w i t h sealing compound (CM 635), which i s t o be
removed p r i o r t o disassembly. P a r t s have t o be potted upon
reinstallation.

1. Removal

a. Remove screw (9) together w i t h washer (8) .


b. ~ o o s e nscrew by approx. 2 t o 3 t u r n s .

NOTE This work s t e p has t o be c a r r i e d out carefully, a s


t h e mounting bracket (21) may drop i n s i d e t h e g r i p .
C. Remove t h e snap r i n g (15) from connector 3/4VEb ( 1 4 ) .
d. Pull out connector 3/4VEb ( 1 4 ) and unsolder respective wiring
according t o t h e wiring diagram. Cut Open t h e s i l i c o n e sleeving
located i n s i d e t h e elbow (13), i f required.
e. Solder an extension wire of 150 mm length t o each of the unsolder
wire leads.
f. Pull out four-way switch (2) and unsolder wire leads.

NOTE Pul1 out four-way switch only t o t h e extent t h a t


wire leads inside t h e elbow can s t i l l be withdrawn
by p u l l i n g t h e extension wires.

Installation
a. Solder wire leads t o terminals of t h e four-way switch ( 2 ) as
applicable wiring diagram i d e n t i f i e d .
b. I n s t a l l four-way switch (2) and secure w i t h screws (9, 10) and
washer ( 8 ) .
C. Withdraw wire leads from elbow (13) by pulling t h e extension wires,
and solder wire leads t o terminals of the connector 314VEb a s t h e
applicable wiring diagram i d e n t i f i e d .
d. Slide i n s u l a t i n g sleeving over solder joints and lace i n s u l a t i n g
sleeving covering t h e wires.
e. I n s t a l l connector 314VEb ( 1 4 ) and secure with snap r i n g (15).

B0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 195
MBB HELICOPTERS
MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB B0 105-

Push button switch Elbow


Four-way s w i t ch Connector
Push button switch Snap r i n g
Ball Trigger
Spring PTT button
Hexagon nut Pin
Threaded Screw
Washer Screw
Screw Mounting bracket
Screw Pi n
Threaded c u t t i n g screw Spring
Push button switch Cap nut

Figure 92-76 Cyclic s t i c k g r i p

B 0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 196
MBB HELICOPTERS
MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB B0 105 -
92 - 99 Removal and i n s t a l l a t i o n - PTT button 14RT
(see f i g u r e 92-76, 17)

1. Removal

VARIANT 1

a. Pull out f our-way switch (2) .


b. Drive out pin (18) a t t h e r i g h t s i d e of t h e g r i p and remove
t r i g g e r (16).
C. Loosen hexagon nut (6) and remove together with threaded pin ( 7 ) ,
spring (5) and b a l l ( 4 ) .
d. Unserew cap nut (24) and remove spring (23) together with pin (22).
e. Unsolder wire leads from connector 3/4VEb a s i d e n t i f i e d and solder an
extension wire of 150 mm t o each unsoldered wire lead.
f. Remove screws (19, 20), p u l l out PTT button (17) from g r i p and
unsolder wiring.

NOTE Pul1 out PTT button only t o t h e extent t h a t wire


leads i n s i d e t h e elbows can s t i l l be pulled out w i t h
extension wires.
VARIANT 2

a. Remove snap r i n g (15) and p u l l connector 3/4VEb ( 1 4 ) from elbow (13).

b. Unsolder respective wiring according t o wiring diagram. Cut Open


s i l i c o n e sleeving located i n s i d e t h e elbow, i f required.
C. Solder an extension wire of 150 mm length t o each unsoldered wire
lead.
d. Drive out pin ( f i g u r e 92-77, 1) a t t h e r i g h t side of t h e grip.

e. Pull out PTT button assy (2) from g r i p and unsolder wiring.

B0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 197
MBB HELICOPTERS
MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB - B 0 105

1 Pin
2 PTT button

Figure 92-77 Removal PTT button 14RT

2. Installation
VARIANT 1

a. Solder wiring t o PTT button (17) a s t h e w i r i n g diagram i d e n t i f i e d and


s l i d e i n s u l a t i n g s l e e v i n g over t h e s o l d e r j o i n t s .
b. I n s t a l l PTT button (17) i n g r i p by sumultaneously p u l l i n g t h e
extension wires downward, u n t i l button i s p r o p e r l y s e a t e d on t h e
grip.
C. Secure PTT button with screws (19, 2 0 ) .
d. I n s t a l l four-way switch (2) ( s e e f i g u r e 92-76).

e. Solder a l l wire l e a d s (of four-way switch and PTT button) t o t e n n i -


n a l s of connector 3/4VEb ( 1 4 ) a s t h e w i r i n g diagram i d e n t i f i e d .

B0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 198
MBB HELICOPTERS
MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB - B0 105

f. S l i d e i n s u l a t i n g s l e e v i n g over s o l d e r j o i n t s and l a c e i n s u l a t i n g
sleeving covering t h e wires.

g. I n s t a l l connector 3/4VEb and secure with snap r i n g ( 1 5 ) .


h. Secure t r i g g e r (16) with p i n ( 1 8 ) .

NOTE I n s t a l l p i n from t h e l e f t s i d e of t h e grip, s o t h a t


t h e knurled end i s on t h e l e f t .

i. I n s e r t p i n (22) and s p r i n g (23) of d e t e n t mechanism i n t o t h e g r i p and


p r o t e c t threaded s l e e v e with cap nut (24) .
j. I n s t a l l b a l l ( 4 ) , s p r i n g (5) and threaded screw (7) t o g e t h e r with
hexagon nut (6) i n t h e g r i p .
k. Adjust threaded p i n (7) i n g r i p u n t i l it i s p e r c e p t i b l e t h a t an
increased s p r i n g l o a d must be overcome when o p e r a t i n g t h e PTT button
from s t a g e 1 t o s t a g e 2.

1. When adjustment i s made, secure threaded p i n (7) with hexagon nut


(6)
VARIANT 2

a. Solder wiring t o PTT button ( f i g u r e 92-77, 2) a s t h e wiring diagram


i d e n t i f i e d and s l i d e i n s u l a t i n g s l e e v i n g over s o l d e r j o i n t s .
b. I n s t a l l PTT button i n g r i p by simultaneously p u l l i n g t h e extension
wires downward, u n t i l t h e button i s p r o p e r l y s e a t e d on t h e g r i p .
C. Secure PTT button with p i n ( 1 8 ) .

NOTE I n s t a l l p i n from t h e l e f t s i d e of t h e grip, s o t h a t


t h e knurled end i s on t h e l e f t .

d. Solder wires t o t e r m i n a l s of connector 314VEb a s t h e wiring diagram


i d e n t i f i e d . S l i d e i n s u l a t i n g s l e e v e over s o l d e r j o i n t s and l a c e
i n s u l a t i n g s l e e v i n g covering t h e wires.
e. I n s t a l l connector 3/4VEb i n elbow and secure with snap r i n g .

B0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 199
MBB HELICOPTERS
MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB - B0 105
92 - 100 Removal and i n s t a l l a t i o n -
push b u t t o n switch
( s e e f i g u r e 92-76, 1, 3, 12)

NOTE Removal and i n s t a l l a t i o n procedures a r e i d e n t i c a l f o r a l l


t h r e e push button switches and t h e r e f o r e described only
f o r one switch.

Removal
a. Remove t h r e a d c u t t i n g screw (11).
b. Remove snap r i n g (15) from connector 3/4VEb ( 1 4 ) .

C. P u l l out connector 3/4VEb and unsolder r e s p e c t i v e wiring according t o


t h e wiring diagram.
d. Solder an extension wire of 150 mm l e n q t h t o each of t h e unsoldered
wire l e a d s .

e. P u l l out push button switch and unsolder t h e wiring.

NOTE Pul1 out push button switch only t o an e x t e n t t h a t


wire l e a d s i n s i d e t h e elbow can st-ill be p u l l e d out
with extension wires.
2. Installation

a. Solder wire l e a d s t o push button switch a s t h e wiring diagram


identified.
b. I n s t a l l push button switch and secure with t h r e a d c u t t i n g screw (11).

NOTE When i n s t a l l i n g t h e push b u t t o n switch, be Sure not t o


apply pressure on t h e a c t u a t i n g button. Press switch i n t o
g r i p by applying p r e s s u r e on t h e c o l l a r around t h e
a c t u a t i n g button.
C. Withdraw wire leads from elbow by p u l l i n g out extension wires and
s o l d e r wires t o terminals of connector 3/4VEb a s t h e wiring diagram
identif ied.
d. S l i d e i n s u l a t i n g sleeving over s o l d e r j o i n t s and l a c e i n s u l a t i n g
sleeving covering t h e wires.

e. I n s t a l l connector 3 / 4 ~ ~and
b secure with snap r i n g ( 1 5 ) .

B0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 200
MBB HELICOPTERS
MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB - B0 105
92-101 C o n t r o l u n i t o n c o l l e c t i v e
p i t C h s t i C k (see f i g u r e 92-78)

The c o n t r o l u n i t 6VE i s mounted on t h e forward end of t h e c o l l e c t i v e p i t c h


s t i c k . It contains t h e following switches:

- Rocker switch llMF - Rescue h o i s t *


- Rocker switch 20LA - Landing l i g h t *
- Four-way switch 8KA - N2 c o n t r o l
- S l i d e switch 24LA - Landing l i g h t *
- S l i d e switch 2MD - Load hook*
- Trigger switch 13MF - Cable c u t t e r

1 Switch llMF*
2 Switch 20LA*
3 Four-way switch 8KA
4 Switch 24LA*
5 Switch 2MD*
6 Switch 13MF

* Optional equipment

Figure 92-78 Typical c o n t r o l u n i t on c o l l e c t i v e p i t c h s t i c k


B0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 2011202
MBB HELICOPTERS
MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB B0 105 -
92 - 102 Removal and i n s t a l l a t i o n - components of c o n t r o l u n i t on
collective pitch stick

92 - 103 Removal and i n s t a l l a t i o n -


four-way switch (8K.A) and
switches llMF, 20LA, 24LA and 2MD ( s e e f i g u r e 92-78)

WARNING DURING ALL MAINTENANCE WORKS ON COLLECTIVE PITCH


STICK SWITCH OFF POWER.
DANGER OE' SHORT CIRCUITS!

NOTE Removal and i n s t a l l a t i o n procedures f o r rocker and


s l i d e switches (3 and 15) a r e i d e n t i c a l .

Removal

a. Switch o f f e l e c t r i c a l power supply.


b. Remove screws (16) and p l a s t i c panel, (2) .
C. Withdraw switches (3, 15) together with wiring from opening i n metal
panel ( 4 ) .
d. Unsolder wiring from switch terminals and remove switches.
e. L i f t o f f t h e metal panel ( 4 ) , loosen clamp (10) and withdraw four-way
switch t o g e t h e r with wiring from opening i n t h e metal panel ( 4 ) .
f. Unsolder wires from switch terminals and remove four-way switch 8KA.

Installation

a. Withdraw wiring of four-way switch (1) from opening i n metal panel


( 4 ) and s o l d e r wires t o switch terminals according t o wiring diagram.

b. I n s t a l l four-way switch 8KA i n metal panel and secure with clamp


(10).
C. Withdraw wiring of switches (3, 15) from opening i n metal panel ( 4 )
and s o l d e r wires t o switch terminals according t o wiring diagram.
d. P o s i t i o n metal panel ( 4 ) i n i t s i n s t a l l a t i o n p o s i t i o n and i n s t a l l
switches (3, 15) i n openings of metal panel.
e. P o s i t i o n p l a s t i c panel ( 2 ) on t o p and secure with screws (16).

B0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 203
MBB HELICOPTERS
MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB - B0 105

Four-way switch
P l a s t i c panel
Rocker swit ch
Meta1 panel
~ r i g g e rswitch
S a f e t y cap
Spring
Washer
Screw
Clamp
Washer
Nut
Washer
Rollpin
S l i d e switch
Screw

Figure 92-79 Removal and I n s t a l l a t i o n of t h e Switches i n


Control Unit on C o l l e c t i v e P i t c h S t i c k

92 - 104 Removal and i n s t a l l a t i o n - switch 13MF


1. Removal

NOTE Rollpin ( 1 4 ) i s bonded t o washer (8) a t r i g h t s i d e . Remove


two-component adhesive (CM 601) p r i o r t o removal of r o l l p i n
a. Remove r o l l p i n ( 1 4 ) t o g e t h e r with washers (8, 1 3 ) , s p r i n g (7) and
s a f e t y cap ( 6 ) .
b. Pul1 out t r i g g e r switch (5) and unsolder wires a t switch t e r m i n a l s .
2. Installation

a. Solder wires t o switch (5) t e r m i n a l s according t o wiring diagram.

NOTE Bond r o l l p i n ( 1 4 ) t o washer a t r i g h t s i d e (CM 601).


b. I n s t a l l t r i g g e r switch (5) and secure with s a f e t y cap ( 6 ) , s p r i n g
( 7 ! , washers (8, 13) and r o l l p i n ( 1 4 ) .

B0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 204
MAINTENANCE MANUAL BO 105

92 -- 105 LIGHTING SYSTEMS


The lighting system consists of:

-- position lights

-- anti--collision lights

-- internal lighting

-- instrument lighting

92 -- 106 Locations -- lighting systems

PART LOCATION FIGURE


Circuit breakers Fig. 92--80
Position light (red) 106LA Port side (LH) or on end plates of horizon- Fig. 92--80
tal stabilizer, left
Position light (green) Starboard side (RH) or on end plates of Fig. 92--80
horizontal stabilizer, right
Tail light (white) 7LA Center of tail boom Fig. 92--80
Toggle switch 29LA Overhead panel 12VE Fig. 92--80
Anti--collision light (red) 4LA Top of tail rotor transmission Fig. 92--85
Anti--collision light (red) 5LA Nose access door or between frame 4v Fig. 92--85
and 4h
Flasher unit 21LA lower right side of the instrument panel Fig. 92--85
2VE
Toggle switch 28LA Overhead panel 12VE Fig. 92--85
Cockpit light 6LC LH side of the cabin ceiling Fig. 92--89
Hand lamp 4LC Overhead panel 12VE Fig. 92--89

Table 92-26 Locations -- Lighting systems(1 of 2)

CHAPTER 92
Page 205
MAINTENANCE MANUAL BO 105

PART LOCATION FIGURE


Cargo compartment light 7LC forward RH side of cargo compartment Fig. 92--89
ceiling
Cargo compartment light 8LC afterward LH side of cargo compartment Fig. 92--89
ceiling
Toggle switch 40LC Overhead panel 12VE Fig. 92--89
Light control unit 9LC Instrument panel 2VE Fig. 92--94

Table 92-26 Locations -- Lighting systems(2 of 2)

92 -- 107 Protection of lighting systems

NOTE With post SB BO105--90--102 fuses can be replaced by circuit breakers.


4A and 6,3A fuses be replaced by 5A circuit breakers, if they are connected with
AWG22 wire.
6,3A fuses be replaced by 7,5A circuit brakers, if they are connected with AWG10 to
AWG20 wires.
For protection of lighting systems the following circuit breakers are installed:

CIRCUIT BREAKER PROTECTED CIR- LOCATION NOMENCLATURE


CUIT

}
2LA 4A Position lighting ”POSITION LIGHT”
1LA 10A Anti--collision lighting ”ANTICOLL LIGHT”
Instrument panel
3LC 1 6,3A Instrument lighting ”INSTR. LIGHT”
2VE right side
1LC 2 Fuse Instrument lighting
2LC 4A Internal lighting ”INTERNAL LIGHT”
EFFECTIVITY 1 S/N 7 -- 160

2 S/N 161 and subsequent

Table 92-27 Protection of lighting systems

CHAPTER 92 Revision 26
Page 206
MAINTENANCE MANUAL BO 105

92 - 108 Position light system (see figures 92-- 80 and 92-- 81)
The position lights help to identify position and flight direction of the helicopter. They consists of a red light 106LA
on the port side (LH) and a green light 206LA on the starboard side (RH). The installation location is as follows:

EFFECTIVITY S S/N 7 -- 120


on the left and right side of the aft fuselage section.
S S/N 121 and subsequent, series D
and if rescue hoist is installed (S/N 7 -- 120) on the end plates of the horizontal stabilizer.
In addition, a white tail light 7LA is mounted on the tail boom. Power supply of the position lights is from the
main bus PP21 via

EFFECTIVITY S S/N 7 -- 120


circuit breaker 2LA ”POSITION LIGHT” on instrument panel 2VE.
S S/N 121 -- 160 and series D
circuit breaker 2LA on instrument panel 2VE and toggle switch 20LA ”POSITION LIGHT”
located on overhead panel 12VE.
S S/N 161 and subsequent
fuse / circuit breaker 2LA located on the lower right side of the instrument panel and toggle
switch 29LA in the overhead panel 12VE.

92 -- 109 Troubleshooting -- position lights

NO. TROUBLE SYMPTOM PROBABLE CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION


1. One of the three position lights Defective lamp Replace defective lamp.
fails to illuminate
Defective electrical wiring be- Check wiring for continuity us-
tween terminal strip 146VV and ing the wiring diagram (refer to
position light. WDM), and repair or replace
defective wiring.

Table 92-28 Troubleshooting -- Position light (1 of 2)

Revision 26 CHAPTER 92
Page 207
MAINTENANCE MANUAL BO 105

NO. TROUBLE SYMPTOM PROBABLE CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION


2. All three position lights fail to il- Defective fuse or circuit breaker Check fuse or circuit breaker
luminate 2LA and replace, as required.
Defective toggle switch 29LA Check toggle switch and re-
place as required.
Defective electrical wiring or Check electrical wiring and con-
connection between instrument nection for continuity using the
panel and terminal strip 146VV. wiring diagram (refer to WDM).
Repair or replace defective wir-
ing, or connection components.

Table 92-28 Troubleshooting -- Position light (2 of 2)

92 -- 110 Inspection and maintenance -- position lights

1. Check lenses of position lights and tail light for damage, contamination and condensation water. Replace
lenses, if required, or clean and make leakproof.

2. Check lamp base and socket for corrosion. Remove corrosion, if possible, or replace lamp or lamp socket.

3. Check vibration dampers (if installed) for damage.


Replace as required.

CHAPTER 92
Page 208
MAINTENANCE MANUAL BO 105

4,6 5

3,7
1 2 3 4 5
BO105_WAH_1517_R

7
6

1 Instrument Panel 2VE EFFECTIVITY


Circuit breaker 2LA 2
Fuse / circuit breaker 2LA 4
1 S/N 7--120
2 Overhead Panel
Toggle switch 29LA 3 2 S/N 7--160 and series D
3 Position light 206LA 1
3 S/N 121 and subsequent, series D
4 Position light 206LA 3
or when rescue hoist installed
5 Position light 7LA 4
6 Position light 106LA 3 4 S/N 161 and subsequent
7 Position light 106LA 1

Figure 92--80 Position Lights

Revision 26 CHAPTER 92
Page 209
MAINTENANCE MANUAL BO 105

MAIN BUS

BO105_WAH_1598_R
PP21 28V--

FUSE 2 LA OVERHEAD PANEL


(CIRCUIT BREAKER)
TOGGLE SWITCH
29 LA

1
2

POSITION LIGHT 106 LA POSITION LIGHT 206 LA


RED GREEN

EFFECTIVITY
TAIL LIGHT 7 LA
WHITE

1 S/N 7--160 and serias D

2 S/N 121 and subsequent, series D

3 S/N 161 and subsequent


With post SB BO105--90--102 fuses
can be replaced by circuit breakers.

Figure 92--81 Position Lights

CHAPTER 92 Revision 26
Page 210
MBB HELICOPTERS
MAINTENANCE MANüAL MBB - B 0 105
92 - 111 Removal and i n s t a l l a t i o n - position l i g h t s

NOTE Removal and i n s t a l l a t i o n procedures f o r t h e l e f t and r i g h t


position l i g h t are identical.

1. Removal (See f i g u r e 92-82)

a. Switch o f f e l e c t r i c a l power supply.


b. Loosen screw (8) and remove t o g e t h e r with l e n s r e t a i n e r (7), l e n s (6)
and l e n s s e a l ( 9 ) .

NOTE Do not touch lamp with f i n g e r s .

C. Remove lamp (10) .


d. Remove screws (5) and p u l 1 lamp holder ( 4 ) from housing (1).
e. Pul1 p r o t e c t i v e cap backward, disconnect e l e c t r i c a l wiring (11) and
remove lamp holder (4) t o g e t h e r with gasket (3) and p r o t e c t i v e
cap (2).
Installation
a. S l i d e p r o t e c t i v e cap (2) and gasket (3) over e l e c t r i c a l wiring (11)
and reconnect wiring t o lamp holder ( 4 ) according t o wiring diagram.
b. S l i d e p r o t e c t i v e cap (2) over wiring connection a t t h e lamp
holder ( 4 ) .
C. I n s t a l l lamp holder ( 4 ) t o g e t h e r with gasket (3) i n housing (1) and
secure with screws ( 5 ) .

NOTE Do not touch lamp with f i n g e r s .

d. I n s t a l l lamp ( 1 0 ) .
e. Place l e n s (6) and l e n s s e a l (9) over lamp and secure i n p o s i t i o n
with l e n s r e t a i n e r ( 7 ) and screw ( 8 ) .
f. Perform a f u n c t i o n a l test ( r e f e r t o paragraph 92-113).

B 0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 211
MBB HELICOPTERS
MAINTENANCE MAmTAL MBB - B 0 105

1 Housing 7 Lens r e t a i n e r
2 Protective 8 Screw
3 Gasket 9 Lens s e a l
4 Laip holder 10 Lamp
5 Screw 11 E l e c t r i c a l wiring
6 Lens

Figure 92-82 Position Light

92 - 112 Removal and i n s t a l l a t i o n - t a i l light

EFFECTIVITY Without vibration damper

1. Removal (see figure 92-83)


a. Remove screws (5) w i t h washers ( 4 ) and pul1 t a i l l i g h t assy from
v e r t i c a l t a i l f a i r i n g (1).
b. Remove protective cap (2) and disconnect e l e c t r i c a l wiring (10) .
NOTE Do not touch lamp w i t h fingers.

C. Push r e t a i n e r c l i p (9) down and remove lens (8) w i t h lens s e a l ( 7 )


and lamp (6) .

B0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 212
MBB HELICOPTERS
MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB - B0 105

900549

Vertical f i n f a i r i n
Protective cap
Lamp holder
Washer
Screw
LamP
Lens s e a l
9
Lens
Retainer c l i p
E l e c t r i c a l wiring

Figure 92-83 T a i l l i g h t (without vibration damper)

Installation

a. Pul1 protective cap (2) over e l e c t r i c a l wiring (10) and connect wires
t o lamp holder ( 3 ) according t o t h e applicable wiring diagram.

b. Slide protective cap over wiring connections a t lamp holder.

C. I n s t a l l lamp holder i n v e r t i c a l t a i l f a i r i n g (1) and secure w i t h


screws (5) and washers ( 4 ) .

NOTE Do not touch lamp w i t h fingers.

d. I n s t a l l lamp (6) .
e. Place lens (8) with l e n s s e a l (7) over lamp and secure w i t h retainer
clip (9).
f. Perfom a functional t e s t (see paragraph 92-113) .
EFFECTIVITY With vibration damper (S/N 451 and subsequent
and when SB 90-27 incorporated) .

B0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 213
MBB HELICOPTERS
MAINTENANCE MANüAL MBB - B 0 105

Vertical t a i l f a i r i n g
Mounting flange
Hex screw
Protective cap
E l e c t r i c a l wiring
Vibration damper
Tail l i g h t

Figure 92-84 T a i l Light (with v i b r a t i o n , damper)


a. Switch off e l e c t r i c a l power supply.
b. Remove lockwire from hex screws (3) and loosen hex screws.
C. Pull t a i l l i g h t (7) together with vibration damper (6) from mounting
flange ( 2 ) .
d. Pull protective cap ( 4 ) backward and disconnect e l e c t r i c a l wiring ( 5 ) .
e. Remove t a i l l i g h t (7) from v i b r a t i o n damper (6) .
f. For removal of lamp r e f e r t o procedures described f o r t a i l l i g h t
without vibration damper.
2. Installation

a. Pull vibration damper ( 6 ) over t a i l l i g h t (7) c o l l a r .


b. Place protective cap ( 4 ) over e l e c t r i c a l wiring (5) and connect
wiring t o t a i l l i g h t i n accordance with t h e wiring diagram. Slide
protective cap over wiring connections on t h e t a i l l i g h t ( 7 ) .
C. I n s t a l l t a i l l i g h t (7) with vibration damper i n mounting flange (2)
and align threaded bushings i n vibration damper w i t h assembly holes
i n mounting flange.
d. Secure t a i l l i g h t with hex screws (3) and s a f e t y hex screw with
lockwire .
B0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 214
MAINTENANCE MANUAL BO 105

e. For installation of lamp refer to procedure described for tail light without vibration damper.

f. Perform a functional test (refer to paragraph 92--113)

92 -- 113 Functional test -- position lights system

1.

EFFECTIVITY S S/N 7 -- 120


Switch on electrical power supply and push circuit breaker 2LA ”POSITION LIGHT”.
S S/N 121 -- 160 and series D
Switch on electrical power supply; push circuit breaker 2LA and switch toggle switch
29LA ”POSITION LIGHT” to ON position.
S S/N 161 and subsequent
Insert fuse 2LA. Switch on electrical power supply and set toggle switch 29LA in ON
position.

2. All three position lights 106LA (red), 206LA (green) and 7LA (white) shall illuminate.

3. Pull circuit breaker and set toggle switch 29LA to OFF position and switch off electrical power supply.

92 - 114 Anti-- collision light system (see figures 92-- 85 and 92-- 86)
The system consists of two red anti--collision lights, which are alternately controlled by the flasher unit 21LA.
The pulse frequency of the flasher unit is between 42 and 50 pulses per minute.
The anti--collision light 5LA is installed:

EFFECTIVITY S S/N 7 -- 100,


on the removable nose access door
S S/N 101 and subsequent,
between frame 4v and 5h
Anti--collision light 4LA is installed on top of the tail rotor transmission and the flasher unit 21LA is installed on
the lower right side of instrument panel 2VE. Both anti--collision lights have iodine--quartz lamps. Power supply
to the anti--collision lights is from the main bus PP21 via:

EFFECTIVITY S S/N 7 -- 120,


circuit breaker 1LA ”ANTICOLL LIGHT” on instr. panel 2VE
S S/N 121 -- 160 and series D
circuit breaker 1LA on instrument panel 2VE and toggle toggle switch 28LA ”ANTICOLL
LIGHT” on overhead panel 12VE

CHAPTER 92
Page 215
MAINTENANCE MANUAL BO 105

S S/N 161 and subsequent


fuse 1LA on the lower right side of instrument panel 2VE and toggle switch 28LA on
overhead panel 12VE

1 2

4
BO105_WAH_1520_R

1 Instrument Panel 2VE


Circuit breaker 1LA 1 EFFECTIVITY
Fuse / circuit breaker 1LA 3

Flasher unit 21LA


1 S/N 7--160 and series D
2 Anti--collision Light 5LA
3 Overhead Panel 2 S/N 121 and subsequent, series D
Toggle switch 28LA 2
4 Anti--collision Light 4LA 3 S/N 161 and subsequent

Figure 92--85 Anti--Collision Light System

CHAPTER 92 Revision 26
Page 216
MAINTENANCE MANUAL BO 105

MAIN BUS
PP21 28V--

FUSE 1LA OVERHEAD PANEL


(CIRCUIT BREAKER)
TOGGLE SWITCH
28LA
1 2
BO105_WAH_1599_R

FLASHER UNIT
21LA
ANTI--COLLISION LIGHT ANTI--COLLISION LIGHT
(FUSELAGE) 5LA (TAIL) 4LA

EFFECTIVITY

1 S/N 7--160 and serias D

2 S/N 121 and subsequent, series D

3 S/N 161 and subsequent


With post SB BO105--90--102 fuses
can be replaced by circuit breakers.

Figure 92--86 Anti--collision Light System

Revision 26 CHAPTER 92
Page 217/218
MBB HELICOPTERS
MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB B0 105 -
92 - 115 Troubleshooting - a n t i - c o l l i s i o n l i g h t system

NO. TROUBLE SYMPTOM PROBABLE CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION

Anti-collision Defective iodine Replace.


l i g h t 4LA o r 5LA q u a r t z lamp.
f a i l s t o flash.
Defective e l e c t r i c a l Check w i r i n g f o r c o n t i n u i t y
w i r i n g between u s i n g ,t h e w i r i n g diagram
f l a s h e r u n i t and ( r e f e r t o WDM), and r e p a i r
anti-collision o r replace defective wiring.
light.
Defective f l a s h e r Check f l a s h e r u n i t f o r
u n i t 21LA. s i g n a l o u t p u t s a t connection
p o i n t s 3 and 5 of t h e ter-
minal s t r i p 39W.
Replace f l a s h e r u n i t , i f
required .

2 Both a n t i - c o l l i s i o n Defective fuse o r Check f u s e o r c i r c u i t


lights f a i l t o c i r c u i t b r e a k e r 1LA. b r e a k e r and r e p l a c e , a s
f lash. necessary.

Defective toggle Check t o g g l e s w i t c h and


s w i t c h 28LA. replace, a s required.

Defective f l a s h e r Check f l a s h e r u n i t f o r s i g -
21LA. n a l i n p u t (connection
point I ) , signal output
(connection p o i n t 3 and 5 )
and ground connection
(connection p o i n t 2 and 4 )
a t t e r m i n a l s t r i p 39W.
Replace f l a s h e r u n i t , i f
required.

Defective e l e c t r i c a l Check w i r i n g and connection


w i r i n g o r connection f o r continuity using t h e
between main bus and w i r i n g diagram ( r e f e r t o
flacher unit. WDM) . Repair o r r e p l a c e de-
f e c t i v e w i r i n g o r connection
components.

3 Incorrect flashing Defective flacher Check f l a s h e r u n i t f o r s i g -


rate. u n i t 21LA. n a l o u t p u t s . Replace f l a s h e r ,
i f required.

Table 92-29 Troubleshooting - a n t i - c o l l i s i o n l i g h t system

B0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 219
MBB HELICOPTERS
MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB -
B 0 105

92 - 116 Inspection f o r condition - anti-collision l i g h t s 4LA, 5LA


1. Check glass domes (2, figure 92-87) for damage, contarnination and conden-
sation water. Replace glass domes, i f necessary, clean and make
leakproof, i f necessary.
2. Check lamp socket ( 4 ) and contacts of iodine quartz lamp (3) f o r
corrosion. Remove corrosion, i f present, or replace lamp and socket
respectively.
3. Check vibration dampers ( 4 ) f o r darnage or porosity, and replace, i f
necessary.
4. Check protective cap (6) or shrink-on sleeve ( 6 ) f o r damage or porosity,
and replace i f necessary.
5. Check clamp (1) f o r corrosion damage and deformation. Inspect spot welds
for cracks.

B0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 220
MBB HELICOPTERS
MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB - B0 105
92 - 117 Removal and i n s t a l l a t i o n - a n t i - c o l l i s i o n l i g h t System
92 - 118 Removal and i n s t a l l a t i o n - anti-collision l i g h t 4LA
(See f i g u r e 92-87)

1. Removal

a. Switch o f f e l e c t r i c a l power supply.


b. Remove clamp (1) and detach t h e g l a s s dome ( 2 ) .

NOTE Do 'not touch iodine-quartz lamp ( 3 ) with f i n g e r s .

C. Remove iodine-quartz lamp.

d. Withdraw lamp socket with v i b r a t i o n damper ( 4 ) from mounting bracket


( 7 ) t o t h e e x t e n t t h a t p r o t e c t i v e cap ( 6 ) may be p u l l e d from
e l e c t r i c a l wiring connections o r t h a t t h e shrink-on sleeve can be
removed.

e. Disconnect e l e c t r i c a l wiring (5) and rernove lamp socket with


v i b r a t i o n damper .

f. Remove screws (11) with washers (10) and p u l 1 mounting bracket (7)
with shim (8) from t a i l r o t o r transmission (9) .

Clamp
Glass dome
Iodine-quartz lamp
Lamp socket with
v i b r a t i o n damper
E l e c t r i c a l wiring
P r o t e c t i v e cap o r
shrink-on s l e e v e
Mounting bracket
Shim
T a i l r o t o r transm.
Washer
Screw

Figure 92-87 Anti-Collision Light 4LA


(on t h e t a i l r o t o r transmission) B 0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 221
MBB HELICOPTERS
MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB - B0 1 0 5
2. Installation
a. Push shim ( 8 ) and mounting bracket ( 7 ) over e l e c t r i c a l wiring ( 5 ) and
position on t a i l rotor transmission ( 9 ) . Secure with screws (11) and
washers (10) .
b. Pull protective cap ( 6 ) or shrink-on sleeve over e l e c t r i c a l wiring
( 5 ) and connect wires t o terminals of lamp socket ( 4 ) according t o
the wiring diagram and s l i d e protective cap over wiring connections
or shrink on t h e sleeve.

NOTE Do not touch iodine-quartz lamp ( 3 ) with fingers.

C. I n s t a l l iodine-quartz lamp.

d. Position lamp socket w i t h vibration damper ( 4 ) and glass dome ( 2 ) on


mounting bracket (7) and secure with clamp (1).
e. Perfom a functional t e s t ( r e f e r t o paragraph 92-121).

92 - 119 Removal and i n s t a l l a t i o n - anti-collision l i g h t 5LA


(see figure 92-88)
1. Removal
a. Refer t o removal procedures of a n t i - c o l l i s i o n l i g h t 4LA,
steps a . t o e .
b. Remove nose access door by loosening quick-release fasteners

EFFECTIVITY o S/N 7-100


and disconnect plug - receptacle connection 3 7 W ( 2 ) .
o S/N 1 0 1 and subsequent
Access t o anti-collision l i g h t 5LA i s via access
hole i n frame 4V.

NOTE The following components are sealed with sealing


compound (CM 6 3 5 ) , and therefore may s t i c k together.
C. Remove screws (1) w i t h washers ( 5 ) and nuts ( 6 ) and

EFFECTIVITY o S/N 7-100


detach angle bracket with receptacle ( 2 ) .
o S/N 1 0 1 and subsequent
Pull shrink sleeve (10) backward and remove
insulating sleeving ( 9 ) .

B 0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 222
MBB HELICOPTERS
MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB - B0 105
d. Remove mounting bracket (8) and shims (3) and remove residual s e a l i n g
component.

1 scr'ew
2 Angle bracket w i t h
receptacle 37W
3 Shim
4 Nose access door,
f uselage
5 Washer
6 Nut
7 E l e c t r i c a l wiring
8 Mounting bracket
9 Insulating sleeving
10 Shrink sleeve

A S/N 101
and sub-
sequent

Figure 92-88 Anti-Collision Light 5LA

2. Installation
a. I n s t a l l mounting bracket (8) , shims (3) and

EFFECTIVITY o S/N 7-100


angle bracket w i t h receptacle (2)
o S/N 1 0 1 and subsequent
shrink sleeve (10)

i n nose access door ( 4 ) respectively and secure w i t h screws ( I ) ,


washers (3) and nuts ( 6 ) .
Apply sealing compound (item 635) t o shims (3) and mounting bracket
(8) p r i o r t o i n s t a l l a t i o n .
b. I n s t a l l nose access door.

C. Refer t o i n s t a l l a t i o n procedures of a n t i - c o l l i s i o n l i g h t 4LA, s t e p b.


t o e.

B0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 223
MBB HELICOPTERS
MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB B0 105 -
92 - 120 Removal and i n s t a l l a t i o n - flasher u n i t 21LA
1. Removal

a. Switch off e l e c t r i c a l power supply and remove instrument panel


fa i r i n g .

b.
EFFECTIVITY o S/N 7-160
Remove s p l i c e s f rom e l e c t r i c a l wiring and
discard.

o S/N 161 and subsequent


Remove p r o t e c t i v e cover from t e n n i n a l s t r i p
39W and disconnect e l e c t r i c a l wiring.
C. Loosen screws a t t h e r e a r of t h e f l a s h e r u n i t and remove t o g e t h e r
.
with f l a s h e r u n i t

2. Installation
a. I n s t a l l f l a s h e r u n i t i n instrurnent panel and secure with screws.

b. Cut wires t o r e q u i r e d length,

EFFECTIVITY o S/N 7-160


and re-connect using new s p l i c e s i n accordance
with t h e wiring diagram.
o S/N 161 and subsequent, s e r i e s D
and provide with t e r m i n a l lugs. Connect wire
t e r m i n a l s s t r i p 39W i n accordance with t h e
wiring diagram ( r e - i n s t a l l t h e p r o t e c t i v e cover!) .
C. Perform a f u n c t i o n a l t e s t ( r e f e r t o paragraph 92-121).

92 - 121 Functional t e s t - anti-Collision Lighting


1. Switch on e l e c t r i c a l power supply and

EFFECTIVITY 0 S/N 7-120


push c i r c u i t breaker 1LA "ANTICOLL LIGHTn.
o S/N 121-160
push c i r c u i t breaker 1LA and s e t t o g g l e switch
28LA "ANTICOLL. LIGHTn t o ON p o s i t i o n .

o S/N 161 and subsequent


i n s e r t f u s e 1LA and set t o g g l e switch 28LA t o
ON p o s i t i o n .

B0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 224
MBB HELICOPTERS
MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB - B 0 105
2. A n t i - c o l l i s i o n l i g h t s 4LA and 5LA must f l a s h a l t e r n a t e a t a r a t e of
42-50 f l a s h e s p e r minute.

3. Set t o g g l e switch t o OFF p o s i t i o n , p u l 1 c i r c u i t breaker and switch o f f


e l e c t r i c a l power supply.

92-122 I n t e r n a 1 l i g h t i n g s y s t e m
( s e e f i g u r e 92-89 and 92-91)

The i n t e r n a l l i g h t i n g system includes cockpit and cargo compartment l i g h t i n g .


The cockpit l i g h t i n g c o n s i s t s of t h e cockpit l i g h t 6LC mounted on t h e LH s i d e
of t h e cabin c e i l i n g above t h e c o p i l o t s e a t and t h e hand lamp secured t o t h e
LH s i d e of t h e overhead panel.
The hand lamp i s designed f o r p o r t a b l e cockpit u t i l i t y use and i s connected
t o t h e h e l i c o p t e r power supply v i a an extension cord. A r h e o s t a t c o n t r o l f o r
ON/OFF and DIMIBRIGHT i s incorporated i n t h e hand lamp.
The cargo compartment l i g h t i n g c o n s i s t s of two l i g h t s 7LC and 8LC i n s t a l l e d
i n t h e cargo compartment c e i l i n g on t h e forward RH s i d e and a f t LH s i d e .
Power supply of t h e i n t e r n a l l i g h t i n g i s from t h e main bus PP21 v i a

EFFECTIVITY o S/N 7 4 2 0
c i r c u i t breaker 2LC "INTERNAL LIGHT" on t h e i n -
strument panel,
o S/N 121-160 and s e r i e s D
c i r c u i t breaker 2LC on t h e instrument panel and
t o g g l e switch 40LC "INTERNAL LIGHT" l o c a t e d
i n t h e overhead panel,
o S/N 161
f u s e 2LC l o c a t e d on t h e lower r i g h t s i d e of t h e in-
strument panel and t o g g l e switch 40LC i n t h e over-
head panel.
Power supply of t h e hand lamp i s only v i a c i r c u i t breaker 2LC o r f u s e 2LC.

. B0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 225
MBB HELICOPTERS
MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB - B0 105

1 Instrument panel (2VE)


C i r c u i t breaker (2LC) /r\ EFFECTIVITY
Fuse (21LC)/J\
2 Toggle switch (40LC)
3 Hand lamp (4LC) S/N 7-160 and s e r i e s D
4 Cockpit l i g h t (6LC) . S/N 121 and subsequent, s e r i e s D
5 Cargo compartment l i g h t (7LC) S/N 161 and subsequent
6 Cargo compartment l i g h t (8LC)

Figure 92-89 I n t e r n a 1 Lighting

B 0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 226
MBB HELICOPTERS
-
MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB B 0 105

MAlN BUS

FUSE 2 LC
(CIRCUIT BREAKER) V - -

HANDLAMP 4 LC
r--------- OVERHEADPANEL
- TOGGE S G T C H A
40 LC I 1
J
,,,
-

COCKPIT
r---- 7

EFFECTIVITY

S/N 7-160 and s e r i e s D

S/N 121 and subsequent, s e r i e s D

S/N 161 and subsequent

Figure 92-90 Interna1 Lighting

1 Hand larnp
2 Rheostat control/
ON/OFF - DIM~BRIGHT
3 Extension cord
4 Mounting bracket

Figure 92-91 Hand Larnp


B0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 227
MBB HELICOPTERS
MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB - B0 105
92 - 123 Troubleshooting - internal lighting
NO. TROUBLE SYMPTOM PROBABLE CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION

Alllightsinclu- Defective fuse or Check fuse or c i r c u i t brea-


ding the hand lamp c i r c u i t breaker 2LC. ker, and replace, as neces-
are inoperative. sary .

Defective wiring o r Check wiring and connection


e l e c t r i c a l connec- f o r continuity using the
t i o n between main wiring diagram ( r e f e r t o WDM) .
bus and terminal Repair or replace defective
s t r i p 31W. wiring or connection com-
ponent s .
Only t h e hand lamp ~ e f e c t i v ebulb. Replace .
f a i l s t o illuminate.
Defective rheostat Replace.
control ON/OFF -
BRIGHT/DIM.

Defective extension Check cord f o r e l e c t r i c a l


cord between hand continuity using t h e wiring
lamp and terminal diagram ( r e f e r t o WDM). Re-
s t r i p 31W. place, as required.
3 Cockpit and cargo Defective wiring o r Check wiring and connection
compartment l i g h t s connection between for continuity using the
f a i l t o illuminate, terminal s t r i p 31W wiring diagram ( r e f e r t o
whereas hand lamp and cockpit l i g h t WDM) . Repair or replace
i s operative. 6LC. defective wiring, or con-
nection components.
Defective toggle Check toggle switch and re-
switch 40LC. place, as necessary.
4 Only one l i g h t Defective lamp. Replace defective lamp.
f a i l s t o illuminate.

Table 92-30 Troubleshooting - Interna1 l i g h t i n g

B0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 228
MBB HELICOPTERS
MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB B0 105 -
92 - 124 Inspection and maintenance - internal lighting
1. Check glass domes f o r damage, contamination and condensation water.
Replace defective glass domes. Clean and make leakproof, as required.

2. Check lamp socket and contacts of lamp f o r corrosion. Remove corrosion,


i f present, or replace lamp and socket respectively.

92 - 125 Removal and i n s t a l l a t i o n - internal lighting (see figure 92-92)

NOTE Removal and i n s t a l l a t i o n procedures of both types


are identical.
1. Removal

a. Switch off e l e c t r i c a l power supply.


b. Remove screws ( 6 ) and detach lens ( 5 ) , together w i t h s e a l .

C. Remove lamp (7).


d. Remove screws ( 8 ) and pul1 l i g h t assy ( 4 ) downward from mounting
bracket (1) .
e. Pul1 protective cap (2) backward over e l e c t r i c a l wiring (3) and dis-
connect wiring. Remove l i g h t assy.
2. Installation
The i n s t a l l a t i o n of the cockpit and cargo compartment l i g h t i s
e s s e n t i a l l y the reverse of the removal.
Perform a functional t e s t subsequent t o i n s t a l l a t i o n ( r e f e r t o para-
graph 92-126) .

B0 105
CHAPTER 9 2 .
Page 229 .
MBB HELICOPTERS
MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB B0 105 -

1 Mounting bracket
2 P r o t e c t i v e cap
3 E l e c t r i c a l wiring
4 Light a s s y
5 Lens
6 Screw
7 Lamp
8 Screw
9 Rivet nut

Figure 92-92 Cockpit and Cargo Compartment Lights

92 - 126 Functional test - internal lighting


1. Test

EFFECTIVITY o S/N 7-120


Switch on e l e c t r i c a l power supply and push c i r -
c u i t breaker 2LC "INTERNAL LIGHTn.
o S/N 121-160 and s e r i e s D
Switch on e l e c t r i c a l power supply; push c i r c u i t
breaker 2LC and s e t toggle switch 40LC "INTERNAL
LIGHTn t o ON p o s i t i o n .

o S/N 161 and subsequent


I n s e r t f u s e 2LC switch on e l e c t r i c a l power supply
and Set t o g g l e switch 40LC t o ON p o s i t i o n .
Cockpit l i g h t 6LC and both cargo compartment l i g h t s 7LC and 8LC must
illuminate.

B 0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 230
MBB HELICOPTERS
MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB B 0 105 -
2. Pul1 hand lamp out of t h e base and t u r n r h e o s t a t c o n t r o l f u l l y t o t h e
right .
- Hand lamp must i l l u m i n a t e .
Turn r h e o s t a t c o n t r o l slowly t o t h e l e f t u n t i l it i n d e n t s i n t h e "OFFn
position.
- The hand lamp must slowly dim and f i n a l l y extinguish.

3. Set t o g g l e switch 40LC t o OFF p o s i t i o n and p u l 1 c i r c u i t breaker 2LC.

92 - 127 I n s t r ume n t 1i g h t i n g (see f i g u r e 92-93 t o 92-95)

The instrument l i g h t i n g includes post and eyebrow l i g h t s which f a c i l i t a t e


reading t h e instruments during darkness.
The magnetic compass u t i l i z e s an i n t e r n a l l i g h t 2LD and t h e o u t s i d e a i r temp.
i n d i c a t o r i s illuminated by l i g h t 20LC a t t a c h e d t o cabin s t r u c t u r e .
I n a d d i t i o n , a reading l i g h t 5LC i s secured t o LH s i d e of t h e h o r i z o n t a l
instrument panel s e c t i o n , which i s a d j u s t a b l e through a f l e x i b l e connection.
Power supply of t h e instrument panel i s from t h e main bus PP21 o r , i f
i n s t a l l e d , from t h e emergency bus PP20 v i a

EFFECTIVITY o S/N 7-160 and s e r i e s D


c i r c u i t breaker 3LC "INSTR. LIGHTn on t h e
instrument panel,

o S/N 161 and subsequent


f u s e 1LC and t o g g l e switch 3LC "INSTR. LIGHTn
on t h e instrument panel.

Light i n t e n s i t y r e g u l a t i o n of t h e instrument l i g h t s i s v i a potentiometer lOLC


"INSTR. LIGHTn and l i g h t c o n t r o l u n i t 9LC i n t h e instrument panel.

B0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 231/232
MBB HELICOPTERS
MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB B0 105-

1 Instrument p a n e l (2VE)
Post and eyebrow l i g h t s EFFECTIVITY
Reading l i g h t (5LC) -
A
C i r c u i t breaker- (3LC) A S/N 7-160 and s e r i e s D
Fuse (1LC)
A
Toggle s v i t c h (3LC) A S/N 161 and subsequent
2 Magnetic compass l i g h t (2LD)
3 Outside a i r temp. i n d .
l i g h t (20LC)

F i g u r e 92-93 Instrument L i g h t i n g

B 0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 233
MBB HELICOPTERS
MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB B 0 105 -
The following i n d i c a t i n g instruments u t i l i z e eyebrow l i g h t s :

Instrument Light

Airspeed i n d i c a t o r
Altimeter
V e r t i c a l speed i n d i c a t o r
T r i p l e o i l temperature i n d i c a t o r 5ED
T r i p l e o i l pressure i n d i c a t o r 4ED

The following i n d i c a t i n g instruments u t i l i z e a d u a l p o s t l i g h t o r two i n d i v i -


dual p o s t l i g h t s :

Instrument Light

T r i p l e RPM i n d i c a t o r 7EN
Shaft moment i n d i c a t o r 2WM
N 1 RPM i n d i c a t o r ENG 1, 108EN upper left
lower right
N 1 RPM i n d i c a t o r ENG 2, 208EN upper left
lower right

The following i n d i c a t i n g instruments u t i l i z e a p o s t l i g h t which i s l o c a t e d on


t h e LH s i d e above t h e instrument:

Instrument Light

Dual torque i n d i c a t o r
TOT i n d i c a t o r ENG 1, 105EL
TOT i n d i c a t o r ENG 2, 205EL
Clock
Dual f u e l q u a n t i t y i n d i c a t o r 5EB
Dual f u e l pressure i n d i c a t o r 2EA

Table 92-31 Instrument l i g h t i n g

B 0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 234
MBB HELICOPTERS
MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB - B0 105
92 - 128 Troubleshooting - instrument lighting

NO. TROUBLE SYMPTOM PROBABLE CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION

1 Entire instrument Defective c i r c u i t Check c i r c u i t breaker, fuse


l i g h t i n g including breaker 3LC, fuse o r toggle switch and replace,
reading l i g h t in- 1LC o r toggle a s necessary.
operative. switch 3LC.
2 Entire instrurnent Defective poten- Check potentiometer and
lighting f a i l s t o tiometer 10LC. replace, a s required.
illuminate , but
reading l i g h t i s Defective l i g h t Replace def ective l i g h t
operative. control unit 9LC. control unit .

3 Reading l i g h t f a i l s Defective lamp. Replace defective lamp.


t o illuminate.
Defective elec- Check wiring f o r continuity
t r i c a l wiring . using t h e wiring diagram
( r e f e r t o WDM) . Repair or
replace, a s necessary.

4 Only individual Def e c t i v e lamps Replace lamp or repair


lights f a i l t o or e l e c t r i c a l wiring, a s necessary.
illuminate . wiring .

Table 92-32 Troubleshooting - instrument l i g h t i n g

92 - 129 Removal and i n s t a l l a t i o n - eyebrow l i g h t s and post l i g h t s


Removal and i n s t a l l a t i o n procedures of l i g h t s a r e described i n t h e
Maintenance I n s t r u c t i o n of t h e respective system t o which the indicating
instrument belongs .

B0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 235
MBB HELICOPTERS
MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB B0 105 -
92 - 130 Removal and i n s t a l l a t i o n - light c o n t r o l u n i t 9LC
(see f i g u r e 92-94)

1. Removal

a. Switch off e l e c t r i c a l power supply and remove instrument panel


fairing .
b. Disconnect e l e c t r i c a l connection a t l i g h t c o n t r o l u n i t 9LC and
p r o t e c t plug 9LCa with a cap,
C. Remove screws (2) with washers (3) and detach l i g h t c o n t r o l u n i t .

1 Light c o n t r o l u n i t
2 Screw
3 Washer

Figure 92-94 Light Control Unit 9LC

2. Installation

The i n s t a l l a t i o n of t h e l i g h t c o n t r o l u n i t i s e s s e n t i a l l y t h e r e v e r s e of
t h e removal. Perform a f u n c t i o n a l t e s t subsequent t o i n s t a l l a t i o n ( r e f e r
t o paragraph 92-132).

B0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 236
MBB HELICOPTERS
MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB - B0 105

92 - 131 Removal and i n s t a l l a t i o n - potentiometer lOLC


(see f i g u r e 92-95)

1. Removal

a. Switch o f f e l e c t r i c a l power supply and remove instrument panel


fairing .
b. Remove c o n t r o l knob (1) .
C. Loosen hex nut (2) and pul1 potentiometer (5) 6ackward from i n s t r u -
ment panel ( 4 ) .
d. Unsolder e l e c t r i c a l wiring (6) and remove potentiometer.

1 Control knob
2 Hex nut
3 Name p l a t e
4 Instrument panel
5 Potentiometer
6 E l e c t r i c a l wiring

Figure 92-95 Potentiometer

2. Installation

The i n s t a l l a t i o n i s e s s e n t i a l l y t h e r e v e r s e of t h e removal.
When r e s o l d e r i n g t h e e l e c t r i c a l wiring, observe t h e applicable wiring
diagram. Perform a f u n c t i o n a l t e s t subsequent t o t h e i n s t a l l a t i o n .

B0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 237
MBB HELICOPTERS
MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB B0 105 -
92 - 132 Functional test - instrument l i g h t i n g

1.
EFFECTIVITY -
o S/N 7 160 and s e r i e s D
Switch on e l e c t r i c a l power supply and push
c i r c u i t breaker 3LC "INSTR. LIGHTn.
o S/N 161 and subsequent
I n s e r t f u s e l L C , switch on e l e c t r i c a l power
supply and s e t t o g g l e switch 3LC "INSTR. LIGHTn
t o ON p o s i t i o n .
- With t h e potentiometer lOLC "INSTR. LIGHTn t u r n e d t o t h e r i g h t , a l l
post and eyebrow l i g h t s on t h e i n d i c a t i n g instruments and t h e reading
l i g h t 5LC (S/N 161 and subsequent, switch on a d d i t i o n a l l y ) must
illuminate .

2. Turn potentiometer lOLC t o t h e l e f t .

- The instrument l i g h t i n g (not t h e reading l i g h t ) must dim.


3. P u l l c i r c u i t breakers and s e t t o g g l e switchei t o OFF p o s i t i o n
r e s p e c t i v e l y and switch o f f t h e e l e c t r i c a l power supply.

92 - 133 W a r n i n g 1i g h t s e gm e n t s (see f i g u r e 92-97)

The t o p s e c t i o n of t h e instrument panel 2VE and t h e v e r t i c a l s e c t i o n contains


t h e warning l i g h t segments.
These warning l i g h t s i n d i c a t e malfunctions and f a i l u r e of major Systems.
Functional t e s t of a l l warning l i g h t s i s performed by p r e s s i n g t h e t e s t
switch "TEST WARN. LIGHTSn 6EB on instrument panel 2VE.
1. Removal and i n s t a l l a t i o n warning l i g h t s lamps (see f i g u r e 92-96).

a. Removal

1) Switch o f f e l e c t r i c a l power supply.

2) Press l a t c h (22) t o t h e r i g h t .

- Lamp board assembly (3) w i l l s l i p out and t h e n can be p u l l e d


from t h e housing (1).
3) P u l l out lamps ( 4 ) from lamp board assembly.

4) Disassemble lamp board assembly a s shown i n f i g u r e 92-96.

B0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 238
MBB HELICOPTERS
MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB B0 105 -

1 Lamp board assembly


2 Push button housing
1 Housing 3 Colour f i l t e r
2 Latch 4 Legend p l a t e
3 Lamp board assembly 5 Legend maskldiffuser
4 Lamp 6 Face p l a t e

Figure 92-96 Warning l i g h t s

b. Installation
I n s t a l l a t i o n i s e s s e n t i a l l y t h e , r e v e r s e of t h e removal.

B0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 239
MBB HELICOPTERS
MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB B0 105 -

EFFECTIVITY S/N 7-60

----
COOL
OIL I ----.-----.----.--------.-----
FUEL
RPM GEN 1 FILT 1 HYD 1

JB K T OIL GEN 2 FILT 2 HYD 2


10ED 7EB 3EW 23P 1EA 3DB 3EV

EFFECTIVITY S/N 6 1 and subsequent

LOW '
FUEL i RPM

N
GEN 2 FlLT 2 1
m I ;L

1 COOL
---*----

W
F
I I

BAT 70

EFFECTIVITY Series D EFFECTIVITY B 0 105 DES

L
C)
N
1
---
GEN I + FILT

GEN 2
i--
1

FILT 2
1 1 ;r~-or(
GEN 2 OH
---
gbL
%: N
[SII+

Figure 92-97 Warning Light Segments


B0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 240
MAINTENANCE MANUAL BO 105

92 - 133AMISCELLANEOUS ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

92 -- 134 Pitot tube heating (see figure 92--98)


The pitot tube supplies the airspeed indicator with dynamic pressure, see chapter 91. The pitot tube can be
heated to prevent the formation of ice. The pitot heating 3HG is supplied with electrical power from the main
bus PP21.

EFFECTIVITY S S/N 7 -- 160


via circuit breaker 1HG in the control panel 2VE.
S Series D
via fuse 5HG and toggle switch 4HG in the control panel 2VE.
S S/N 161 and subsequent
via fuse 1HG and toggle switch 4HG in the control panel 2VE.
The indicator 2HG in the instrument panel indicates the operation of pitot tube heating 3HG. To drain condensa-
tion water and to connect test equipment, a T--piece with cap assembly is installed in the pipe/hose line system.

MAIN BUS
PP21 28V--

FUSE 1 HG
(CIRCUIT BREAKER)

TOGGLE SWITCH
4 HG

INDICATOR
2 HG
BO105_WAH_1581_R

PITOT TUBE
HEATING 3 HG
PITOT TUBE

Figure 92--98 Pitot tube heating 3HG

Revision 26 CHAPTER 92
Page 241
MAINTENANCE MANUAL BO 105

92 -- 135 Troubleshooting -- pitot tube heating

NO. TROUBLE SYMPTOM PROBABLE CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION


1. Pitot tube does not heat EFFECTIVITY S/N 7--160 Cir- Check circuit breaker and re-
cuit breaker ”PITOT TUBE place, if necessary.
HEATING” defective.
EFFECTIVITY S/N 161 and Check fuse / circuit breaker and
subsequent fuse / circuit replace, if necessary.
breaker 1HG defective
Toggle switch ”Pitot tube heat- Check toggle switch and re-
ing” defective place, if necessary.
Heating element in pitot tube Check heating element be-
defective tween contact pins on pitot tube
for continuity and replace, if
necessary.
Cabling between circuit breaker Check cabling for continuity and
fuse and connection to pitot replace or repair, if necessary.
tube defective
EFFECTIVITY Series D fuse / Check fuse / circuit breaker or
circuit breaker 5HG defective replace, if necessary.
Toggle switch ”PITOT HEAT- Check toggle switch or replace,
ING” defective if necessary.
Heating element defective Check continuity and replace, if
necessary.
Table 92-33 Troubleshooting -- Pitot tube heating

92 -- 136 Functional test -- pitot tube heating

1. Connect external power unit and remove pitot tube protection. On indicator 2HG ”PITOT TUBE HEATING”
the white sectors must be visible on the black background.

2. Switch on pitot tube heating.

NOTE The pitot tube heating should be switched on only briefly when the Helicopter is on the
ground.

CHAPTER 92 Revision 26
Page 242
MAINTENANCE MANUAL BO 105

EFFECTIVITY S S/N 7 -- 160


Depress circuit breaker 1HG ”PITOT TUBE HEATING”.
S Series D
Insert fuse or circuit breaker 5HG and switch on toggle switch 4HG ”PITOT HEATING”.
S S/N 161 and subsequent
Insert fuse or circuit breaker 1HG and switch on toggle switch 4HG ”PITOT HEATING”.

-- The white sectors on indicator 2HG ”PITOT HEATING” must no longer be visible.

CAUTION PITOT TUBE MAY OVERHEAT.

3. Find out whether the pitot tube is being heated by carefully moving hand towards it.

4. Switch off pitot heating and external power unit.

5. Put on pitot tube protection when the tube has cooled down.

92 - 137 Overhead panel 12VE (see figure 92-- 99 and 92-- 100)
The overhead panel 12VE is located above the pilot seats in the center of the cabin roof. The overhead panel
consists of an upper section, solidly riveted to the cabin ceiling, and a lower section, bolted to the upper section.
The overhead panel contains -- depending upon series number and configuration -- control units required for
the operation of various electrical systems (e.g. optional equipment).
A hand lamp is mounted to left side of upper overhead panel section.

Revision 26 CHAPTER 92
Page 243/244
MBB HELICOPTERS
MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB - B0 105

1 Overhead panel -
upper section
EFFECTIVITY 2 Headset jack, VHF -
radio com. 10RE'*
@ 3 Microphone jack, VHF
4 Overhead panel -
-
radio com. 11W*
lower section
5 Hand lamp
6 Headset jack, VHF -
radio com. 8W*
7 Microphone jack, VHF -
radio com. 9W*
8 Microphone jack, VHF -
radio corn. 7RF*
9 Headset jack, VHF -
radio com. 6W*
* Optional equipment

Figure 92-99 Overhead panel 12VE

B 0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 245
MBB HELICOPTERS
MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB B0 105 -

'*G:l il

GEN l GEN i

FUEL SIU-6
L---------------
% 3

1 Pushbutton, VHF r a d i o comm. 12RF*


2 Pushbutton 104P, 204P
3 Toggle switch 28LA, 29LA, 40LA
4 Toggle switch l l Q M , 12QM, 13QM, 14QM

* Optional equipment

Figure 92-100 Typical overhead panel 12VE with o p e r a t i n g switch

B0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 246
MBB HELICOPTERS
MAINTENANCE MANUAL MBB - B0 105
92 - 138 C e n t e r p a n e 1 (see f i g u r e 92-101)

The c e n t e r panel i s l o c a t e d between t h e p i l o t s e a t s and extends from t h e


h o r i z o n t a l s e c t i o n of t h e instrument panel 2VE.
The c e n t e r panel c o n t a i n s t h e c o n t r o l s of t h e o p t i o n a l epuipment ( r e f e r t o
MOM, chapter 801 o r t o Avionic Manual) .

O O C

Figure 92-101 Typical c e n t e r panel

B0 105
CHAPTER 92
Page 2471248

You might also like